Materials and methods for treatment of Usher syndrome type 2A and/or non-syndromic autosomal recessive retinitis pigmentosa (ARRP)

ABSTRACT

The present application provides materials and methods for treating a patient with one or more of Usher Syndrome Type 2A and ARRP, both ex vivo and in vivo; materials and methods for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299. In addition, the present application provides one or more gRNAs or sgRNAs for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299; a therapeutic comprising at least one or more gRNAs or sgRNAs for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299; and a therapeutic for treating a patient with one or more of Usher Syndrome Type 2A and ARRP. The present application also provides a kit for treating a patient with one or more of Usher Syndrome Type 2A and ARRP.

RELATED APPLICATIONS

This application is a continuation of International Application No. PCT/IB2018/060547, filed Dec. 21, 2018, which claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional Application No. 62/609,334 filed Dec. 21, 2017. The entire contents of these applications are incorporated herein by reference in their entirety.

FIELD

The present application provides materials and methods for treating Usher Syndrome Type 2A and/or non-syndromic autosomal recessive Retinitis Pigmentosa (ARRP).

INCORPORATION BY REFERENCE OF SEQUENCE LISTING

The instant application contains a Sequence Listing which has been submitted electronically in ASCII format via EFS-Web, and is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. Said ASCII copy, created on Jun. 18, 2020, is named Sequence_Listing_CBTN_004PCCN.txt and is 11058722 bytes in size.

BACKGROUND

Usher syndrome is a condition that affects both hearing and vision. The major symptoms of Usher syndrome are hearing loss and an eye disorder called retinitis pigmentosa (RP), which causes night-blindness and a loss of peripheral vision through the progressive degeneration of the retina. Many people with Usher syndrome also have severe balance problems.

RP refers to a group of inherited disorders in which abnormalities of the photoreceptors (rods and cones) of the retina lead to progressive visual loss. RP is classified as nonsyndromic, or “simple” (not affecting other organs or tissues); syndromic (affecting other neurosensory systems such as hearing); or systemic (affecting multiple tissues).

There are currently no adequate treatments for Usher Syndrome or non-syndromic autosomal recessive Retinitis Pigmentosa (ARRP) that can efficiently halt or slow the progression of the visual loss associated with the diseases and there still remains a critical need for developing safe and effective treatments for Usher Syndrome and ARRP.

SUMMARY

The present disclosure presents a novel method to ameliorate, if not eliminate, Usher Syndrome Type 2A and/or ARRP. The novel approach targets a deletion of a guanine residue at nucleotide position c.2299 (c.2299delG) located in exon 13 of the USH2A gene with a method resulting in the excision of the c.2299delG. Furthermore, in some cases, the treatment can be effected with a small number of treatments and, in some cases, with a single treatment. The resulting therapy can ameliorate Usher Syndrome Type 2A and/or ARRP associated with c.2299delG, or in some cases, can eliminate Usher Syndrome Type 2A and/or ARRP associated with c.2299delG.

Provided herein is a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299. The method comprises: introducing into a human cell one or more deoxyribonucleic acid (DNA) endonuclease, thereby effecting one or more single-strand breaks (SSBs) or double-strand breaks (DSBs) within or near one or more of: intron 12-13, exon 13, and intron 13-14 of the USH2A gene. The one or more SSBs or DSBs result in a correction thereby creating an edited human cell.

Also provided herein is an in vivo method for treating a patient with one or more of Usher Syndrome Type 2A and ARRP. The method comprises: editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 in a cell of the patient.

Provided herein is a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299. The method comprises: introducing into a human cell one or more DNA endonuclease, thereby effecting one or more SSBs or DSBs within or near one or more of: intron 12-13, exon 13, and intron 13-14 of the USH2A gene. The one or more SSBs or DSBs result in a modulation of expression or function of the USH2A gene thereby creating an edited human cell.

Provided herein is a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299. The method comprises: introducing into a human cell one or more DNA endonuclease thereby effecting one or more SSBs or DSBs within or near one or more of: intron 12-13, exon 13, and intron 13-14 of the USH2A gene. The one or more SSBs or DSBs result in a correction thereby creating an edited human cell.

Also provided herein is one or more guide ribonucleic acids (gRNAs) for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 in a cell from a patient with one or more of Usher Syndrome Type 2A and ARRP. The one or more gRNAs comprise a spacer sequence selected from the group consisting of nucleic acid sequences in SEQ ID NOs: 5272-5314 of the Sequence Listing.

Also provided herein is a therapeutic for treating a patient with one or more of Usher Syndrome Type 2A and ARRP, the therapeutic comprising at least one or more gRNAs for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299. The one or more gRNAs comprise a spacer sequence selected from the group consisting of nucleic acid sequences in SEQ ID NOs: 5272-5314 of the Sequence Listing.

Also provided herein is a therapeutic for treating a patient with one or more of Usher Syndrome Type 2A and ARRP. The therapeutic is formed by a method comprising: introducing one or more DNA endonuclease; introducing one or more gRNA or one or more sgRNA for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299; and optionally introducing one or more donor template. The one or more gRNAs or sgRNAs comprise a spacer sequence selected from the group consisting of nucleic acid sequences in SEQ ID NOs: 5272-5314 of the Sequence Listing.

Also provided herein is a kit for treating a patient with one or more of Usher Syndrome Type 2A and ARRP in vivo. The kit comprises: one or more gRNAs or sgRNAs for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299, one or more DNA endonucleases, and optionally, one or more donor template. The one or more gRNAs or sgRNAs comprise a spacer sequence selected from the group consisting of nucleic acid sequences in SEQ ID NOs: 5272-5314 of the Sequence Listing.

Also provided herein is a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299. The method comprises: deleting a sequence comprising the guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 of the USH2A gene in a cell using a first gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5295 and a second gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5313.

Also provided herein is a method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299. The method comprises:

administering a first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA to the patient, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5295 and the second gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5313.

Also provided herein is a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299. The method comprises: deleting a sequence comprising the guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 of the USH2A gene in a cell using a first gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5295 and a second gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5314.

Also provided herein is a method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299. The method comprises: administering a first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA to the patient, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5295 and the second gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5314.

Also provided herein is a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299. The method comprises: deleting a sequence comprising the guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 of the USH2A gene in a cell using a first gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5299 and a second gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5313.

Also provided herein is a method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299. The method comprises: administering a first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA to the patient, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5299 and the second gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5313.

Also provided herein is a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299. The method comprises: deleting a sequence comprising the guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 of the USH2A gene in a cell using a first gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5299 and a second gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5314.

Also provided herein is a method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299, the method comprising: administering a first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA to the patient, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5299 and the second gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5314.

Also provided herein is a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299, the method comprising: deleting a sequence comprising the guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 of the USH2A gene in a cell using a first gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5295 and a second gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5276.

Also provided herein is a method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299. The method comprises: administering a first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA to the patient, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5295 and the second gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5276.

Also provided herein is a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299, the method comprising: deleting a sequence comprising the guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 of the USH2A gene in a cell using a first gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5295 and a second gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5275.

Also provided herein is a method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299. The method comprises: administering a first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA to the patient, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5295 and the second gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5275.

Also provided herein is a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299. The method comprises: deleting a sequence comprising the guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 of the USH2A gene in a cell using a first gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5295 and a second gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5277.

Also provided herein is a method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299. The method comprises: administering a first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA to the patient, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5295 and the second gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5277.

Also provided herein is a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299. The method comprises: deleting a sequence comprising the guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 of the USH2A gene in a cell using a first gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5295 and a second gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5278.

Also provided herein is a method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299. The method comprises: administering a first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA to the patient, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5295 and the second gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5278.

Also provided herein is a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299. The method comprises: deleting a sequence comprising the guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 of the USH2A gene in a cell using a first gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5295 and a second gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5287.

Also provided herein is a method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299. The method comprises: administering a first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA to the patient, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5295 and the second gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5287.

Also provided herein is a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299. The method comprises: deleting a sequence comprising the guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 of the USH2A gene in a cell using a first gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5295 and a second gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5286.

Also provided herein is a method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299. The method comprises: administering a first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA to the patient, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5295 and the second gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5286.

Also provided herein is a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299. The method comprises: deleting a sequence comprising the guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 of the USH2A gene in a cell using a first gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5295 and a second gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5290.

Also provided herein is a method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299. The method comprises: administering a first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA to the patient, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5295 and the second gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5290.

Also provided herein is a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299. The method comprises: deleting a sequence comprising the guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 of the USH2A gene in a cell using a first gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5295 and a second gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5291.

Also provided herein is a method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299. The method comprises: administering a first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA to the patient, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5295 and the second gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5291.

Also provided herein is a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299. The method comprises: deleting a sequence comprising the guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 of the USH2A gene in a cell using a first gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5295 and a second gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5292.

Also provided herein is a method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299. The method comprises: administering a first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA to the patient, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5295 and the second gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5292.

Also provided herein is a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299. The method comprises: deleting a sequence comprising the guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 of the USH2A gene in a cell using a first gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5295 and a second gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5294.

Also provided herein is a method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299. The method comprises: administering a first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA to the patient, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5295 and the second gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5294.

Also provided herein is a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299. The method comprises: deleting a sequence comprising the guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 of the USH2A gene in a cell using a first gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5295 and a second gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5296.

Also provided herein is method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299. The method comprises: administering a first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA to the patient, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5295 and the second gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5296.

Also provided herein is a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299. The method comprises: deleting a sequence comprising the guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 of the USH2A gene in a cell using a first gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5295 and a second gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5302.

Also provided herein is a method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299. The method comprises: administering a first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA to the patient, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5295 and the second gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5302.

Also provided herein is a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299. The method comprises: deleting a sequence comprising the guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 of the USH2A gene in a cell using a first gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5295 and a second gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5310.

Also provided herein is a method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299. The method comprises: administering a first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA to the patient, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5295 and the second gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5310.

Also provided herein is a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299. The method comprises: deleting a sequence comprising the guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 of the USH2A gene in a cell using a first gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5299 and a second gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5276.

Also provided herein is a method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299. The method comprises: administering a first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA to the patient, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5299 and the second gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5276.

Also provided herein is a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299. The method comprises: deleting a sequence comprising the guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 of the USH2A gene in a cell using a first gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5299 and a second gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5275.

Also provided herein is a method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299. The method comprises: administering a first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA to the patient, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5299 and the second gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5275.

Also provided herein is a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299. The method comprises: deleting a sequence comprising the guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 of the USH2A gene in a cell using a first gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5299 and a second gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5277.

Also provided herein is a method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299. The method comprises: administering a first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA to the patient, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5299 and the second gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5277.

Also provided herein is a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299. The method comprises: deleting a sequence comprising the guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 of the USH2A gene in a cell using a first gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5299 and a second gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5278.

Also provided herein is a method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299. The method comprises: administering a first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA to the patient, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5299 and the second gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5278.

Also provided herein is a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299. The method comprises: deleting a sequence comprising the guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 of the USH2A gene in a cell using a first gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5299 and a second gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5287.

Also provided herein is a method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299. The method comprises: administering a first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA to the patient, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5299 and the second gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5287.

Also provided herein is a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299. The method comprises: deleting a sequence comprising the guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 of the USH2A gene in a cell using a first gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5299 and a second gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5286.

Also provided herein is a method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299. The method comprises: administering a first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA to the patient, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5299 and the second gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5286.

Also provided herein is a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299. The method comprises: deleting a sequence comprising the guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 of the USH2A gene in a cell using a first gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5299 and a second gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5290.

Also provided herein is a method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299. The method comprises: administering a first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA to the patient, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5299 and the second gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5290.

Also provided herein is a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299. The method comprises: deleting a sequence comprising the guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 of the USH2A gene in a cell using a first gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5299 and a second gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5291.

Also provided herein is a method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299. The method comprises: administering a first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA to the patient, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5299 and the second gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5291.

Also provided herein is a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299. The method comprises: deleting a sequence comprising the guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 of the USH2A gene in a cell using a first gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5299 and a second gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5292.

Also provided herein is a method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299. The method comprises: administering a first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA to the patient, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5299 and the second gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5292.

Also provided herein is a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299. The method comprises: deleting a sequence comprising the guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 of the USH2A gene in a cell using a first gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5299 and a second gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5294.

Also provided herein is a method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299. The method comprises: administering a first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA to the patient, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5299 and the second gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5294.

Also provided herein is a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299. The method comprises: deleting a sequence comprising the guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 of the USH2A gene in a cell using a first gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5299 and a second gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5296.

Also provided herein is a method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299. The method comprises: administering a first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA to the patient, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5299 and the second gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5296.

Also provided herein is a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299. The method comprises: deleting a sequence comprising the guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 of the USH2A gene in a cell using a first gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5299 and a second gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5302.

Also provided herein is a method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299. The method comprises: administering a first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA to the patient, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5299 and the second gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5302.

Also provided herein is a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299. The method comprises: deleting a sequence comprising the guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 of the USH2A gene in a cell using a first gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5299 and a second gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5310.

Also provided herein is a method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299. The method comprises: administering a first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA to the patient, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5299 and the second gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5310.

It is understood that the inventions described in this specification are not limited to the examples summarized in this Summary. Various other aspects are described and exemplified herein. This Summary is not intended to limit the scope of the claims.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

Various aspects of materials and methods for treatment of Usher Syndrome and/or ARRP disclosed and described in this specification can be better understood by reference to the accompanying figures, in which:

FIGS. 1A-B depict the type II CRISPR/Cas system;

FIG. 1A depicts the type II CRISPR/Cas system including gRNA;

FIG. 1B depicts the type II CRISPR/Cas system including sgRNA;

FIGS. 2A-C show the single guide RNA (sgRNA) sequence, the target DNA sequence, and the reverse strand of the target DNA sequence to which the sgRNA binds, for each of 43 sgRNA sequences;

FIG. 2A shows the single guide RNA (sgRNA) sequence, for each of 43 sgRNA sequences;

FIG. 2B shows the target DNA sequence, for each of 43 sgRNA sequences;

FIG. 2C shows the reverse strand of the target DNA sequence to which the sgRNA binds, for each of 43 sgRNA sequences;

FIGS. 3A-D show a diagram depicting a guanine deletion in exon 13 of the USH2A gene at nucleotide position c.2299, the result of excising the entire exon 13 including the guanine deletion, and the result of excising part of exon 13 including the guanine deletion;

FIG. 3A shows a diagram depicting a guanine deletion in exon 13 of the USH2A gene at nucleotide position c.2299 and the premature stop codon that results from the guanine deletion;

FIG. 3B shows a diagram depicting the result of deleting the entire exon 13 including the guanine deletion of the USH2A gene at nucleotide position c.2299; and

FIG. 3C shows a diagram depicting the result of deleting part of exon 13 including the guanine deletion of the USH2A gene at nucleotide position c.2299.

FIG. 3D shows a diagram depicting the result of deleting part of exon 13 including the guanine deletion of the USH2A gene at nucleotide position c.2299.

FIG. 4 shows editing efficiency data for each of the 43 sgRNAs listed in FIG. 2A. The sgRNAs target sequences in intron 12-13, exon 13, and/or intron 13-14 of the USH2A gene.

FIG. 5 shows locations within the USH2A gene that are targeted by selected sgRNAs.

FIGS. 6A-C show selected sgRNAs used as dual sgRNAs; a diagram showing possible ddPCR products amplified from genomic DNA; and exon 13 deletion efficiency data for selected sgRNAs used as dual sgRNAs.

FIG. 6A is a table listing selected sgRNAs used as dual sgRNAs, SED ID NOs for the sgRNA spacer sequences, and the expected sizes of deletions generated by genome editing.

FIG. 6B is a diagram showing possible ddPCR products amplified from USH2A gene genomic DNA, including a target PCR product of 216 bp amplified from exon 13 and a reference PCR product of 187 bp amplified from exon 17.

FIG. 6C shows exon 13 deletion efficiency data for selected sgRNAs used as dual sgRNAs. The sgRNAs can create whole and/or partial exon 13 deletions.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE SEQUENCE LISTING

SEQ ID NOs: 1-612 are Cas endonuclease ortholog sequences.

SEQ ID NOs: 613-4696 are microRNA sequences.

SEQ ID NOs: 4697-5265 are AAV serotype sequences.

SEQ ID NO: 5266 is a human USH2A nucleotide sequence.

SEQ ID NOs: 5267-5269 show sample sgRNA backbone sequences that Streptococcus pyogenes Cas9 (SpCas9) is complexed with.

SEQ ID NO: 5270 is a sample guide RNA (gRNA) for a SpCas9 endonuclease.

SEQ ID NO: 5271 shows a known family of homing endonuclease, as classified by its structure.

SEQ ID NOs: 5272-5314 are 20 bp spacer sequences for targeting within or near intron 12-13, exon 13, or intron 13-14 of the USH2A gene with a S. pyogenes Cas9 endonuclease.

SEQ ID NOs: 5315-5357 are sequences that represent the target DNA sequences, for each of 43 sgRNA sequences.

SEQ ID NOs: 5358-5400 are sequences that represent the reverse strands of the target DNA sequence to which the sgRNA will bind, for each of 43 sgRNA sequences.

SEQ ID NOs: 5401 and 5402 are oligonucleotide sequences used to amplify a target PCR product from a section of genomic DNA from exon 13 of the USH2A gene.

SEQ ID NO: 5403 is a ddPCR oligonucleotide probe used to detect a target PCR product.

SEQ ID NOs: 5404 and 5405 are oligonucleotide sequences used to amplify a reference PCR product from a section of genomic DNA from exon 17 of the USH2A gene.

SEQ ID NO: 5406 is a ddPCR oligonucleotide probe used to detect a reference PCR product.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION

Applicants have discovered a novel method for treating Usher Syndrome Type 2A and/or ARRP, e.g., an Usher Syndrome Type 2A or ARRP associated with an USH2A gene containing a c.2299delG. The method can result in slowing or reversing the development of Usher Syndrome Type 2A and/or ARRP or preventing development of either disease in an individual.

Therapeutic Approach

The methods provided herein, regardless of whether a cellular, ex vivo or in vivo method can involve one or a combination of the following methods. One method involves excising c.2299delG located in exon 13 of the USH2A gene by deleting the entire exon 13, as depicted in FIG. 3B. A second method involves partially excising the c.2299delG located in exon 13 of the USH2A gene by partially deleting exon 13, as depicted in FIG. 3C. A third method involves partially excising the c.2299delG located in exon 13 of the USH2A gene by partially deleting exon 13, as depicted in FIG. 3D. A fourth method involves correcting the c.2299delG located in exon 13 of a USH2A gene by first deleting the entire exon 13 or partially deleting exon 13 and then correcting via HDR.

The three excision methods can induce a SSB or DSB upstream of the c.2299delG and a SSB or DSB downstream of the c.2299delG using one or more CRISPR endonucleases and two gRNA (e.g., crRNA+tracrRNA, or sgRNA).

In the first excision method, as depicted in FIG. 3B, a first guide RNA (e.g., crRNA+tracrRNA, or sgRNA), targets within or near the intron 12-13 region of the USH2A gene and a second guide RNA (e.g., crRNA+tracrRNA, or sgRNA) targets within or near the intron 13-14 region of the USH2A gene. Intron 12-13 is 3,676 bps and is located upstream of exon 13 of the USH2A gene. Intron 13-14 is 14,448 bp and is located downstream of exon 13 of the USH2A gene. The two SSBs or DSBs generated by the two guide RNAs delete the entire exon 13, which is 642 bp, including the c.2299delG via NHEJ, which results in a shortened usherin protein. The shortened usherin protein lacks 4 of 10 Rod-like laminin-EGF-like (LE) domains, but can remain as a functional protein. This first excision method utilizes gRNAs or sgRNAs specific for the regions upstream of the c.2299delG, such as within or near the intron 12-13 region of the USH2A. This first excision method further utilizes gRNAs or gRNAs specific for the regions downstream of the c.2299delG, such as within or near the intron 13-14 region of the USH2A gene.

In the second excision method, as depicted in FIG. 3C, a first guide RNA (e.g., crRNA+tracrRNA, or sgRNA), targets within or near the intron 12-13 region of the USH2A gene and a second guide RNA (e.g., crRNA+tracrRNA, or sgRNA) targets within exon 13 of the USH2A gene. The two SSBs or DSBs generated by the two guide RNAs partially delete exon 13, including the c.2299delG via NHEJ, which results in a shortened usherin protein. In addition to the c.2299delG, the deletion can also include the branch sequence and the acceptor splice site. The absence of the branch sequence and 5′acceptor splice site leads to exon 13 skipping during mRNA processing. The exon 13 skipping generates an in-frame, but shorter usherin protein. This second excision method utilizes gRNAs or sgRNAs specific for the regions upstream of the c.2299delG, such as within or near the intron 12-13 region of the USH2A. This second excision method further utilizes gRNAs or sgRNAs specific for the regions downstream of the c.2299delG, such as within exon 13 of the USH2A gene.

In the third excision method, as depicted in FIG. 3D, a first guide RNA (e.g., crRNA+tracrRNA, or sgRNA), targets within exon 13 of the USH2A gene and a second guide RNA (e.g., crRNA+tracrRNA, or sgRNA) targets within or near the intron 13-14 region of the USH2A gene. The two SSBs or DSBs generated by the two guide RNAs partially delete exon 13, including the c.2299delG via NHEJ, which results in a shortened usherin protein. In addition to the c.2299delG, the deletion can also include the donor splice site and the branch site. The absence of the donor splice site and/or branch site leads to exon 13 skipping during mRNA processing. The exon 13 skipping generates an in-frame, but shorter usherin protein. This third excision method utilizes gRNAs or sgRNAs specific for the regions upstream of the c.2299delG, such as within exon 13 of the USH2A. This third excision method further utilizes gRNAs or sgRNAs specific for the regions downstream of the c.2299delG, such as within or near intron 13-14 of the USH2A gene.

The deletions can be from 50 to 10,000 base pairs (bp) in size. For example, deletions can range from 50-100; 50-150; 50-200; 50-250; 50-500; 50-1000; 50-1,500; 50-2,000; 50-2,500; 50-3,000; 50-3,500; 50-4,000, 50-4,500; 50-5,000; 50-5,500; 50-6,000; 50-6,500; 50-7,000; 50-7,500; 50-8,000; 50-8,500; 50-9,000; 50-9,500; 50-10,000, 150-5000, 150-7500, 100-1000, 200-1000, 300-1000, 400-1000, 500-1000, 600-1000, 700-1000, 800-1000, 900-1000, or 200-850 base pairs in size.

The HDR strategy can involve inducing one single-stranded break or double-stranded break upstream and downstream of the c.2299delG in the USH2A gene with one or more CRISPR endonucleases and a gRNA (e.g., crRNA+tracrRNA, or sgRNA), or two or more single-stranded breaks or double-stranded breaks upstream and downstream of the c.2299delG in the USH2A gene with one or more CRISPR endonucleases (Cas9, Cpf1 and the like) and two or more gRNAs, in the presence of a donor DNA template introduced exogenously to direct the cellular DSB response to Homology-Directed Repair. The donor DNA template can be a short single-stranded oligonucleotide, a short double-stranded oligonucleotide, a long single or double-stranded DNA molecule. The methods can provide gRNA pairs that make a deletion by cutting the gene twice, one gRNA cutting upstream of the c.2299delG and the other gRNA cutting downstream of the c.2299delG that facilitates insertion of a new sequence from a polynucleotide donor template to replace the c.2299delG in the USH2A gene. The cutting can be accomplished by a pair of DNA endonucleases that each makes a DSB (one DSB upstream of the c.2299delG and the second DSB downstream of the c.2299delG), or by multiple nickases that together make a DSB (one DSB upstream of the c.2299delG and the second DSB downstream of the c.2299delG). This HDR method utilizes gRNAs or sgRNAs that target regions upstream and downstream of the c.2299delG in the USH2A gene and donor DNA molecules.

The advantages for the above strategies (excision and HDR strategies) are similar, including in principle both short and long term beneficial clinical and laboratory effects.

Such methods use endonucleases, such as CRISPR-associated (Cas9, Cpf1 and the like) nucleases, to stably correct the c.2299delG within the genomic locus of the USH2A gene. Any CRISPR endonuclease can be used in the methods of the present disclosure, each CRISPR endonuclease having its own associated PAM, which can or cannot be disease specific. For example, gRNA spacer sequences for targeting the c.2299delG in the USH2A gene with a CRISPR/Cas9 endonuclease from S. pyogenes have been identified in SEQ ID NOs: 5272-5314 of the Sequence Listing.

Examples set forth in the present disclosure can induce single-stranded breaks or double-stranded breaks upstream and downstream of the c.2299delG in the USH2A gene to introduce an excision or correct the c.2299delG of the USH2A gene with as few as a single treatment (rather than deliver potential therapies for the lifetime of the patient).

Usher Syndrome

Usher syndrome is an autosomal recessive disease, characterized by sensorineural hearing loss, retinitis pigmentosa and in some cases, vestibular dysfunction. The prevalence of Usher Syndrome has been estimated to be between 1/6000 and 1/25000.

Usher Syndrome is a clinically and genetically heterogeneous disease, accounting for about half of all cases of combined hereditary deafness-blindness. To date the disease has been associated with 13 genes. Three clinical forms of the disease have been identified (USH I, II, and III) based on the severity of the hearing impairment, the presence or absence of vestibular dysfunction, and the age of onset of the disease.

Usher Syndrome Type II is the most frequent clinical form accounting for approximately 50% of all Usher Syndrome cases. Usher Syndrome Type II is characterized by congenital hearing loss and progressive vision loss starting in adolescence or adulthood. The hearing loss ranges from mild to severe and mainly affects the ability to hear high-frequency sounds. Vision loss occurs as the light-sensing cells of the retina gradually deteriorate. Night vision loss begins first, followed by loss of the peripheral vision. With time, these blind areas enlarge and merge to produce tunnel vision. In some cases, vision is further impaired by cataracts. Many patients become legally blind in the 5^(th) decade of life.

Usher Syndrome Type 2A is due to a mutation in the USH2A gene and accounts for approximately 80% of all Usher Syndrome Type II cases and 40% of all Usher Syndrome cases.

Non-Syndromic Autosomal Recessive Retinitis Pigmentosa (ARRP)

8% of non-syndromic ARRP patients have mutations in the USH2A gene with a high prevalence of the mutations being c.2299delG located in exon 13 of the USH2A gene.

USH2A Gene

The USH2A gene (e.g., SEQ ID NO: 5266) is 800,503 base pairs and is located on Chromosome 1: 215,622,893:216,423,395 (Genome Reference Consortium—GRCh38/hg38) (1q41). USH2A gene comprises 72 exons and encodes for two alternatively spliced isoforms of a protein called usherin. The full-length 580 kDa usherin protein (isoform b) is a complex transmembrane protein of 5,202 amino acids with a large extracellular domain. The short 170 kDa usherin protein (isoform a) is translated from the splice variant consisting of only the first 21 coding exons, and is regarded as an extracellular protein of 1546 amino acids.

The usherin protein is located next to vesicle loading point at the periciliary membrane and may play a role in vesicle transport between the inner segments and the outer segments of photoreceptors.

c.2299delG

There are various mutations associated with Usher Syndrome, which can be insertions, deletions, missense, nonsense, frameshift and other mutations, with the common effect of inactivating the USH2A gene.

The most common mutation in USH2A patients is a single nucleotide deletion, e.g., a guanine deletion in exon 13 at nucleotide position c.2299 (c.2299delG/p.E767Sfs*21) in the USH2A gene. This mutation accounts for up to 30% of all USH2A patients, depending on the population, and leads to a frameshift that generates a premature stop codon (p.E767Sfs*21), as depicted in FIG. 3A. The truncated protein disrupts hearing and vision, leading to visual and hearing loss.

Any one or more of the mutations can be repaired to restore the usherin protein function. For example, the pathological variant, c.2299delG, can be excised or corrected to restore the usherin protein expression (See Table 1).

TABLE 1 Variant Location Variant type c.2299delG 1:216247095 deletion (GRCh38/hg38)

In Vivo Based Therapy

Provided herein are methods for treating a patient with one or more of Usher Syndrome Type 2A and ARRP. In some aspects, the method is an in vivo cell-based therapy. Chromosomal DNA of the cells in the Usher Syndrome type 2A and/or ARRP patient can be edited using the materials and methods described herein. For example, the in vivo method can comprise editing a c.2299delG in a USH2A gene in a cell of a patient, such as photoreceptor cells or retinal progenitor cells.

Although certain cells present an attractive target for ex vivo treatment and therapy, increased efficacy in delivery may permit direct in vivo delivery to such cells. Ideally the targeting and editing would be directed to the relevant cells. Cleavage in other cells can also be prevented by the use of promoters only active in certain cells and or developmental stages. Additional promoters are inducible, and therefore can be temporally controlled if the nuclease is delivered as a plasmid. The amount of time that delivered RNA and protein remain in the cell can also be adjusted using treatments or domains added to change the half-life. In vivo treatment would eliminate a number of treatment steps, but a lower rate of delivery can require higher rates of editing. In vivo treatment can eliminate problems and losses from ex vivo treatment and engraftment.

An advantage of in vivo gene therapy can be the ease of therapeutic production and administration. The same therapeutic approach and therapy will have the potential to be used to treat more than one patient, for example a number of patients who share the same or similar genotype or allele. In contrast, ex vivo cell therapy typically requires using a patient's own cells, which are isolated, manipulated and returned to the same patient.

Ex Vivo Based Therapy

Provided herein are methods for treating a patient with one or more of Usher Syndrome type 2A and ARRP. An aspect of such method is an ex vivo cell-based therapy. For example, a patient-specific induced pluripotent stem cell (iPSC) can be created. Then, the chromosomal DNA of these iPSC cells can be edited using the materials and methods described herein. For example, the method can comprise editing a c.2299delG in a USH2A gene of the iPSC. Next, the genome-edited iPSCs can be differentiated into other cells, such as photoreceptor cells or retinal progenitor cells. Finally, the differentiated cells, such as photoreceptor cell or retinal progenitor cell, can be implanted into the patient (i.e., implanted into the patient's eye).

Another aspect of such method is an ex vivo cell-based therapy. For example, photoreceptor cells or retinal progenitor cells can be isolated from the patient. Next, the chromosomal DNA of these photoreceptor cells or retinal progenitor cells can be edited using the materials and methods described herein. For example, the method can comprise editing a c.2299delG in a USH2A gene of the photoreceptor cells or retinal progenitor cells. Finally, the genome-edited photoreceptor cells or retinal progenitor cells can be implanted into the patient (i.e., implanted into the patient's eye).

Another aspect of such method is an ex vivo cell-based therapy. For example, a mesenchymal stem cell can be isolated from the patient, which can be isolated from the patient's bone marrow, peripheral blood, adipose tissue, or umbilical cord. Next, the chromosomal DNA of these mesenchymal stem cells can be edited using the materials and methods described herein. For example, the method can comprise editing a c.2299delG in a USH2A gene of the mesenchymal stem cells. Next, the genome-edited mesenchymal stem cells can be differentiated into any type of cell, e.g., photoreceptor cells or retinal progenitor cells. Finally, the differentiated cells, e.g., photoreceptor cells or retinal progenitor cells can be implanted into the patient (i.e., implanted into the patient's eye).

One advantage of an ex vivo cell therapy approach is the ability to conduct a comprehensive analysis of the therapeutic prior to administration. Nuclease-based therapeutics can have some level of off-target effects. Performing gene correction ex vivo allows one to characterize the corrected cell population prior to implantation. The present disclosure includes sequencing the entire genome of the corrected cells to ensure that the off-target effects, if any, can be in genomic locations associated with minimal risk to the patient. Furthermore, populations of specific cells, including clonal populations, can be isolated prior to implantation.

Another advantage of ex vivo cell therapy relates to genetic correction in iPSCs compared to other primary cell sources. iPSCs are prolific, making it easy to obtain the large number of cells that will be required for a cell-based therapy. Furthermore, iPSCs are an ideal cell type for performing clonal isolations. This allows screening for the correct genomic correction, without risking a decrease in viability. In contrast, other primary cells, such as photoreceptor cells or retinal progenitor cells, are viable for only a few passages and difficult to clonally expand. Thus, manipulation of iPSCs for the treatment of one or more of Usher Syndrome Type 2A and ARRP can be much easier, and can shorten the amount of time needed to make the desired genetic correction.

Genome Editing

Genome editing refers to the process of modifying the nucleotide sequence of a genome, such as in a precise or pre-determined manner. Examples of methods of genome editing described herein include methods of using site-directed nucleases to cut DNA at precise target locations in the genome, thereby creating single-strand or double-strand DNA breaks at particular locations within the genome. Such breaks can be and regularly are repaired by natural, endogenous cellular processes, such as HDR and NHEJ. These two main DNA repair processes consist of a family of alternative pathways. NHEJ directly joins the DNA ends resulting from a double-strand break, sometimes with the loss or addition of nucleotide sequence, which may disrupt or enhance gene expression. HDR utilizes a homologous sequence, or donor sequence, as a template for inserting a defined DNA sequence at the break point. The homologous sequence can be in the endogenous genome, such as a sister chromatid. Alternatively, the donor can be an exogenous nucleic acid, such as a plasmid, a single-strand oligonucleotide, a double-stranded oligonucleotide, a duplex oligonucleotide or a virus, that has regions of high homology with the nuclease-cleaved locus, but which can also contain additional sequence or sequence changes including deletions that can be incorporated into the cleaved target locus. A third repair mechanism can be microhomology-mediated end joining (MMEJ), also referred to as “Alternative NHEJ (ANHEJ)”, in which the genetic outcome is similar to NHEJ in that small deletions and insertions can occur at the cleavage site. MMEJ can make use of homologous sequences of a few base pairs flanking the DNA break site to drive a more favored DNA end joining repair outcome, and recent reports have further elucidated the molecular mechanism of this process. In some instances, it may be possible to predict likely repair outcomes based on analysis of potential microhomologies at the site of the DNA break.

Each of these genome editing mechanisms can be used to create desired genomic alterations. A step in the genome editing process can be to create one or two DNA breaks, the latter as double-strand breaks or as two single-stranded breaks, in the target locus as near the site of intended mutation. This can be achieved via the use of site-directed polypeptides, as described and illustrated herein.

Site-directed polypeptides, such as a DNA endonuclease, can introduce double-strand breaks or single-strand breaks in nucleic acids, e.g., genomic DNA. The double-strand break can stimulate a cell's endogenous DNA-repair pathways [e.g., homology-dependent repair (HDR) or non-homologous end joining (NHEJ) or (ANHEJ) or (MMEJ)]. NHEJ can repair cleaved target nucleic acid without the need for a homologous template. This can sometimes result in small deletions or insertions (indels) in the target nucleic acid at the site of cleavage, and can lead to disruption or alteration of gene expression.

HDR can occur when a homologous repair template, or donor, is available. The homologous donor template can comprise at least a portion of the wild-type USH2A gene, or cDNA. The at least a portion of the wild-type USH2A gene or cDNA can be exon 1, exon 2, exon 3, exon 4, exon 5, exon 6, exon 7, exon 8, exon 9, exon 10, exon 11, exon 12, exon 13, exon 14, exon 15, exon 16, exon 17, exon 18, exon 19, exon 20, exon 21, exon 22, exon 23, exon 24, exon 25, exon 26, exon 27, exon 28, exon 29, exon 30, exon 31, exon 32, exon 33, exon 34, exon 35, exon 36, exon 37, exon 38, exon 39, exon 40, exon 41, exon 42, exon 43, exon 44, exon 45, exon 46, exon 47, exon 48, exon 49, exon 50, exon 51, exon 52, exon 53, exon 54, exon 55, exon 56, exon 57, exon 58, exon 59, exon 60, exon 61, exon 62, exon 63, exon 64, exon 65, exon 66, exon 67, exon 68, exon 69, exon 70, exon 71, exon 72, intronic regions, fragments or combinations thereof, or the entire USH2A gene or cDNA.

The donor template can be either a single or double-stranded polynucleotide. The donor template can be up to 10 kb. The donor template can be up to 9 kb. The donor template can be up to 8 kb. The donor template can be up to 7 kb. The donor template can be up to 6 kb. The donor template can be up to 5 kb. The donor template can be up to 4 kb. The donor template can be up to 3 KB. The donor template can be up to 2 kb. The donor template can be up to 1 kb. The donor template can be less than 1 kb. The donor template can be 500-1000 bp. The donor template can be 250-500 bp. The donor template can be 100-250 bp. The donor template can be 50-100 bp. The donor template can be delivered by AAV. The homologous donor template can comprise sequences that can be homologous to sequences flanking the target nucleic acid cleavage site. For example, the donor template can have homologous arms to exon 13. The sister chromatid can be used by the cell as the repair template. However, for the purposes of genome editing, the repair template can be supplied as an exogenous nucleic acid, such as a plasmid, duplex oligonucleotide, single-strand oligonucleotide, double-stranded oligonucleotide, or viral nucleic acid. With exogenous donor templates, an additional nucleic acid sequence (such as a transgene) or modification (such as a single or multiple base change or a deletion) can be introduced between the flanking regions of homology so that the additional or altered nucleic acid sequence also becomes incorporated into the target locus. MMEJ can result in a genetic outcome that is similar to NHEJ as small deletions and insertions can occur at the cleavage site. MMEJ can make use of homologous sequences of a few base pairs flanking the cleavage site to drive a favored end-joining DNA repair outcome. In some instances, it may be possible to predict likely repair outcomes based on analysis of potential microhomologies in the nuclease target regions.

Thus, in some cases, homologous recombination can be used to insert an exogenous polynucleotide sequence into the target nucleic acid cleavage site. An exogenous polynucleotide sequence is termed a donor polynucleotide (or donor or donor sequence or polynucleotide donor template) herein. The donor polynucleotide, a portion of the donor polynucleotide, a copy of the donor polynucleotide, or a portion of a copy of the donor polynucleotide can be inserted into the target nucleic acid cleavage site. The donor polynucleotide can be an exogenous polynucleotide sequence, i.e., a sequence that does not naturally occur at the target nucleic acid cleavage site.

The modifications of the target DNA due to NHEJ and/or HDR can lead to, for example, gene correction.

CRISPR Endonuclease System

A CRISPR (Clustered Regularly Interspaced Short Palindromic Repeats) genomic locus can be found in the genomes of many prokaryotes (e.g., bacteria and archaea). In prokaryotes, the CRISPR locus encodes products that function as a type of immune system to help defend the prokaryotes against foreign invaders, such as virus and phage. There are three stages of CRISPR locus function: integration of new sequences into the CRISPR locus, expression of CRISPR RNA (crRNA), and silencing of foreign invader nucleic acid. Five types of CRISPR systems (e.g., Type I, Type II, Type III, Type U, and Type V) have been identified.

A CRISPR locus includes a number of short repeating sequences referred to as “repeats.” When expressed, the repeats can form secondary structures (e.g., hairpins) and/or comprise unstructured single-stranded sequences. The repeats usually occur in clusters and frequently diverge between species. The repeats are regularly interspaced with unique intervening sequences referred to as “spacers,” resulting in a repeat-spacer-repeat locus architecture. The spacers are identical to or have high homology with known foreign invader sequences. A spacer-repeat unit encodes a crisprRNA (crRNA), which is processed into a mature form of the spacer-repeat unit. A crRNA comprises a “seed” or spacer sequence that is involved in targeting a target nucleic acid (in the naturally occurring form in prokaryotes, the spacer sequence targets the foreign invader nucleic acid). A spacer sequence is located at the 5′ or 3′ end of the crRNA.

A CRISPR locus also comprises polynucleotide sequences encoding CRISPR Associated (Cas) genes. Cas genes encode endonucleases involved in the biogenesis and the interference stages of crRNA function in prokaryotes. Some Cas genes comprise homologous secondary and/or tertiary structures.

Type II CRISPR Systems

crRNA biogenesis in a Type II CRISPR system in nature requires a trans-activating CRISPR RNA (tracrRNA). The tracrRNA can be modified by endogenous RNaseIII, and then hybridizes to a crRNA repeat in the pre-crRNA array. Endogenous RNaseIII can be recruited to cleave the pre-crRNA. Cleaved crRNAs can be subjected to exoribonuclease trimming to produce the mature crRNA form (e.g., 5′ trimming). The tracrRNA can remain hybridized to the crRNA, and the tracrRNA and the crRNA associate with a site-directed polypeptide (e.g., Cas9). The crRNA of the crRNA-tracrRNA-Cas9 complex can guide the complex to a target nucleic acid to which the crRNA can hybridize. Hybridization of the crRNA to the target nucleic acid can activate Cas9 for targeted nucleic acid cleavage. The target nucleic acid in a Type II CRISPR system is referred to as a protospacer adjacent motif (PAM). In nature, the PAM is essential to facilitate binding of a site-directed polypeptide (e.g., Cas9) to the target nucleic acid. Type II systems (also referred to as Nmeni or CASS4) are further subdivided into Type II-A (CASS4) and II-B (CASS4a). Jinek et al., Science, 337(6096):816-821 (2012) showed that the CRISPR/Cas9 system is useful for RNA-programmable genome editing, and international patent application publication number WO2013/176772 provides numerous examples and applications of the CRISPR/Cas endonuclease system for site-specific gene editing.

Type V CRISPR Systems

Type V CRISPR systems have several important differences from Type II systems. For example, Cpf1 is a single RNA-guided endonuclease that, in contrast to Type II systems, lacks tracrRNA. In fact, Cpf1-associated CRISPR arrays can be processed into mature crRNAs without the requirement of an additional trans-activating tracrRNA. The Type V CRISPR array can be processed into short mature crRNAs of 42-44 nucleotides in length, with each mature crRNA beginning with 19 nucleotides of direct repeat followed by 23-25 nucleotides of spacer sequence. In contrast, mature crRNAs in Type II systems can start with 20-24 nucleotides of spacer sequence followed by about 22 nucleotides of direct repeat. Also, Cpf1 can utilize a T-rich protospacer-adjacent motif such that Cpf1-crRNA complexes efficiently cleave target DNA preceded by a short T-rich PAM, which is in contrast to the G-rich PAM following the target DNA for Type II systems. Thus, Type V systems cleave at a point that is distant from the PAM, while Type II systems cleave at a point that is adjacent to the PAM. In addition, in contrast to Type II systems, Cpf1 cleaves DNA via a staggered DNA double-stranded break with a 4 or 5 nucleotide 5′ overhang. Type II systems cleave via a blunt double-stranded break. Similar to Type II systems, Cpf1 contains a predicted RuvC-like endonuclease domain, but lacks a second HNH endonuclease domain, which is in contrast to Type II systems.

Cas Genes/Polypeptides and Protospacer Adjacent Motifs

Exemplary CRISPR/Cas polypeptides include the Cas9 polypeptides in FIG. 1 of Fonfara et al., Nucleic Acids Research, 42: 2577-2590 (2014). The CRISPR/Cas gene naming system has undergone extensive rewriting since the Cas genes were discovered. FIG. 5 of Fonfara, supra, provides PAM sequences for the Cas9 polypeptides from various species.

Site-Directed Polypeptides

A site-directed polypeptide is a nuclease used in genome editing to cleave DNA. The site-directed nuclease can be administered to a cell or a patient as either: one or more polypeptides, or one or more mRNAs encoding the polypeptide. Any of the enzymes or orthologs listed in SEQ ID NOs: 1-612, or disclosed herein, can be utilized in the methods herein.

In the context of a CRISPR/Cas or CRISPR/Cpf1 system, the site-directed polypeptide can bind to a guide RNA that, in turn, specifies the site in the target DNA to which the polypeptide is directed. In the CRISPR/Cas or CRISPR/Cpf1 systems disclosed herein, the site-directed polypeptide can be an endonuclease, such as a DNA endonuclease.

A site-directed polypeptide can comprise a plurality of nucleic acid-cleaving (i.e., nuclease) domains. Two or more nucleic acid-cleaving domains can be linked together via a linker. For example, the linker can comprise a flexible linker. Linkers can comprise 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 30, 35, 40 or more amino acids in length.

Naturally-occurring wild-type Cas9 enzymes comprise two nuclease domains, a HNH nuclease domain and a RuvC domain. Herein, the “Cas9” refers to both naturally occurring and recombinant Cas9s. Cas9 enzymes contemplated herein can comprise a HNH or HNH-like nuclease domain, and/or a RuvC or RuvC-like nuclease domain.

HNH or HNH-like domains comprise a McrA-like fold. HNH or HNH-like domains comprises two antiparallel β-strands and an α-helix. HNH or HNH-like domains comprises a metal binding site (e.g., a divalent cation binding site). HNH or HNH-like domains can cleave one strand of a target nucleic acid (e.g., the complementary strand of the crRNA targeted strand).

RuvC or RuvC-like domains comprise an RNaseH or RNaseH-like fold. RuvC/RNaseH domains are involved in a diverse set of nucleic acid-based functions including acting on both RNA and DNA. The RNaseH domain comprises 5 β-strands surrounded by a plurality of α-helices. RuvC/RNaseH or RuvC/RNaseH-like domains comprise a metal binding site (e.g., a divalent cation binding site). RuvC/RNaseH or RuvC/RNaseH-like domains can cleave one strand of a target nucleic acid (e.g., the non-complementary strand of a double-stranded target DNA).

Site-directed polypeptides can introduce double-strand breaks or single-strand breaks in nucleic acids, e.g., genomic DNA. The double-strand break can stimulate a cell's endogenous DNA-repair pathways (e.g., HDR or NHEJ or ANHEJ or MMEJ). NHEJ can repair cleaved target nucleic acid without the need for a homologous template. This can sometimes result in small deletions or insertions (indels) in the target nucleic acid at the site of cleavage, and can lead to disruption or alteration of gene expression. HDR can occur when a homologous repair template, or donor, is available. The homologous donor template can comprise sequences that are homologous to sequences flanking the target nucleic acid cleavage site. The sister chromatid can be used by the cell as the repair template. However, for the purposes of genome editing, the repair template can be supplied as an exogenous nucleic acid, such as a plasmid, duplex oligonucleotide, single-strand oligonucleotide or viral nucleic acid. With exogenous donor templates, an additional nucleic acid sequence (such as a transgene) or modification (such as a single or multiple base change or a deletion) can be introduced between the flanking regions of homology so that the additional or altered nucleic acid sequence also becomes incorporated into the target locus. MMEJ can result in a genetic outcome that is similar to NHEJ as small deletions and insertions can occur at the cleavage site. MMEJ can make use of homologous sequences of a few base pairs flanking the cleavage site to drive a favored end-joining DNA repair outcome. In some instances, it may be possible to predict likely repair outcomes based on analysis of potential microhomologies in the nuclease target regions.

Thus, in some cases, homologous recombination can be used to insert an exogenous polynucleotide sequence into the target nucleic acid cleavage site. An exogenous polynucleotide sequence is termed a donor polynucleotide (or donor or donor sequence) herein. The donor polynucleotide, a portion of the donor polynucleotide, a copy of the donor polynucleotide, or a portion of a copy of the donor polynucleotide can be inserted into the target nucleic acid cleavage site. The donor polynucleotide can be an exogenous polynucleotide sequence, i.e., a sequence that does not naturally occur at the target nucleic acid cleavage site.

The site-directed polypeptide can comprise an amino acid sequence having at least 10%, at least 15%, at least 20%, at least 30%, at least 40%, at least 50%, at least 60%, at least 70%, at least 75%, at least 80%, at least 85%, at least 90%, at least 95%, at least 99%, or 100% amino acid sequence identity to a wild-type exemplary site-directed polypeptide [e.g., Cas9 from S. pyogenes, US2014/0068797 Sequence ID No. 8 or Sapranauskas et al., Nucleic Acids Res, 39(21): 9275-9282 (2011)], and various other site-directed polypeptides. The site-directed polypeptide can comprise at least 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 95, 97, 99, or 100% identity to a wild-type site-directed polypeptide (e.g., Cas9 from S. pyogenes, supra) over 10 contiguous amino acids. The site-directed polypeptide can comprise at most: 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 95, 97, 99, or 100% identity to a wild-type site-directed polypeptide (e.g., Cas9 from S. pyogenes, supra) over 10 contiguous amino acids. The site-directed polypeptide can comprise at least: 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 95, 97, 99, or 100% identity to a wild-type site-directed polypeptide (e.g., Cas9 from S. pyogenes, supra) over 10 contiguous amino acids in a HNH nuclease domain of the site-directed polypeptide. The site-directed polypeptide can comprise at most: 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 95, 97, 99, or 100% identity to a wild-type site-directed polypeptide (e.g., Cas9 from S. pyogenes, supra) over 10 contiguous amino acids in a HNH nuclease domain of the site-directed polypeptide. The site-directed polypeptide can comprise at least: 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 95, 97, 99, or 100% identity to a wild-type site-directed polypeptide (e.g., Cas9 from S. pyogenes, supra) over 10 contiguous amino acids in a RuvC nuclease domain of the site-directed polypeptide. The site-directed polypeptide can comprise at most: 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 95, 97, 99, or 100% identity to a wild-type site-directed polypeptide (e.g., Cas9 from S. pyogenes, supra) over 10 contiguous amino acids in a RuvC nuclease domain of the site-directed polypeptide.

The site-directed polypeptide can comprise a modified form of a wild-type exemplary site-directed polypeptide. The modified form of the wild-type exemplary site-directed polypeptide can comprise a mutation that reduces the nucleic acid-cleaving activity of the site-directed polypeptide. The modified form of the wild-type exemplary site-directed polypeptide can have less than 90%, less than 80%, less than 70%, less than 60%, less than 50%, less than 40%, less than 30%, less than 20%, less than 10%, less than 5%, or less than 1% of the nucleic acid-cleaving activity of the wild-type exemplary site-directed polypeptide (e.g., Cas9 from S. pyogenes, supra). The modified form of the site-directed polypeptide can have no substantial nucleic acid-cleaving activity. When a site-directed polypeptide is a modified form that has no substantial nucleic acid-cleaving activity, it is referred to herein as “enzymatically inactive.”

The modified form of the site-directed polypeptide can comprise a mutation such that it can induce a SSB on a target nucleic acid (e.g., by cutting only one of the sugar-phosphate backbones of a double-strand target nucleic acid). The mutation can result in less than 90%, less than 80%, less than 70%, less than 60%, less than 50%, less than 40%, less than 30%, less than 20%, less than 10%, less than 5%, or less than 1% of the nucleic acid-cleaving activity in one or more of the plurality of nucleic acid-cleaving domains of the wild-type site directed polypeptide (e.g., Cas9 from S. pyogenes, supra). The mutation can result in one or more of the plurality of nucleic acid-cleaving domains retaining the ability to cleave the complementary strand of the target nucleic acid, but reducing its ability to cleave the non-complementary strand of the target nucleic acid. The mutation can result in one or more of the plurality of nucleic acid-cleaving domains retaining the ability to cleave the non-complementary strand of the target nucleic acid, but reducing its ability to cleave the complementary strand of the target nucleic acid. For example, residues in the wild-type exemplary S. pyogenes Cas9 polypeptide, such as Asp10, His840, Asn854 and Asn856, are mutated to inactivate one or more of the plurality of nucleic acid-cleaving domains (e.g., nuclease domains). The residues to be mutated can correspond to residues Asp10, His840, Asn854 and Asn856 in the wild-type exemplary S. pyogenes Cas9 polypeptide (e.g., as determined by sequence and/or structural alignment). Non-limiting examples of mutations include D10A, H840A, N854A or N856A. Mutations other than alanine substitutions can be suitable.

A D10A mutation can be combined with one or more of H840A, N854A, or N856A mutations to produce a site-directed polypeptide substantially lacking DNA cleavage activity. A H840A mutation can be combined with one or more of D10A, N854A, or N856A mutations to produce a site-directed polypeptide substantially lacking DNA cleavage activity. A N854A mutation can be combined with one or more of H840A, D10A, or N856A mutations to produce a site-directed polypeptide substantially lacking DNA cleavage activity. A N856A mutation can be combined with one or more of H840A, N854A, or D10A mutations to produce a site-directed polypeptide substantially lacking DNA cleavage activity. Site-directed polypeptides that comprise one substantially inactive nuclease domain are referred to as “nickases”.

Nickase variants of RNA-guided endonucleases, for example Cas9, can be used to increase the specificity of CRISPR-mediated genome editing. Wild type Cas9 is typically guided by a single guide RNA designed to hybridize with a specified ˜20 nucleotide sequence in the target sequence (such as an endogenous genomic locus). However, several mismatches can be tolerated between the guide RNA and the target locus, effectively reducing the length of required homology in the target site to, for example, as little as 13 nt of homology, and thereby resulting in elevated potential for binding and double-strand nucleic acid cleavage by the CRISPR/Cas9 complex elsewhere in the target genome—also known as off-target cleavage. Because nickase variants of Cas9 each only cut one strand, in order to create a double-strand break it is necessary for a pair of nickases to bind in close proximity and on opposite strands of the target nucleic acid, thereby creating a pair of nicks, which is the equivalent of a double-strand break. This requires that two separate guide RNAs—one for each nickase—must bind in close proximity and on opposite strands of the target nucleic acid. This requirement essentially doubles the minimum length of homology needed for the double-strand break to occur, thereby reducing the likelihood that a double-strand cleavage event will occur elsewhere in the genome, where the two guide RNA sites—if they exist—are unlikely to be sufficiently close to each other to enable the double-strand break to form. As described in the art, nickases can also be used to promote HDR versus NHEJ. HDR can be used to introduce selected changes into target sites in the genome through the use of specific donor sequences that effectively mediate the desired changes.

Mutations contemplated can include substitutions, additions, and deletions, or any combination thereof. The mutation converts the mutated amino acid to alanine. The mutation converts the mutated amino acid to another amino acid (e.g., glycine, serine, threonine, cysteine, valine, leucine, isoleucine, methionine, proline, phenylalanine, tyrosine, tryptophan, aspartic acid, glutamic acid, asparagine, glutamine, histidine, lysine, or arginine). The mutation converts the mutated amino acid to a non-natural amino acid (e.g., selenomethionine). The mutation converts the mutated amino acid to amino acid mimics (e.g., phosphomimics). The mutation can be a conservative mutation. For example, the mutation converts the mutated amino acid to amino acids that resemble the size, shape, charge, polarity, conformation, and/or rotamers of the mutated amino acids (e.g., cysteine/serine mutation, lysine/asparagine mutation, histidine/phenylalanine mutation). The mutation can cause a shift in reading frame and/or the creation of a premature stop codon. Mutations can cause changes to regulatory regions of genes or loci that affect expression of one or more genes.

The site-directed polypeptide (e.g., variant, mutated, enzymatically inactive and/or conditionally enzymatically inactive site-directed polypeptide) can target nucleic acid. The site-directed polypeptide (e.g., variant, mutated, enzymatically inactive and/or conditionally enzymatically inactive endoribonuclease) can target DNA. The site-directed polypeptide (e.g., variant, mutated, enzymatically inactive and/or conditionally enzymatically inactive endoribonuclease) can target RNA.

The site-directed polypeptide can comprise one or more non-native sequences (e.g., the site-directed polypeptide is a fusion protein).

The site-directed polypeptide can comprise an amino acid sequence comprising at least 15% amino acid identity to a Cas9 from a bacterium (e.g., S. pyogenes), a nucleic acid binding domain, and two nucleic acid cleaving domains (i.e., a HNH domain and a RuvC domain).

The site-directed polypeptide can comprise an amino acid sequence comprising at least 15% amino acid identity to a Cas9 from a bacterium (e.g., S. pyogenes), and two nucleic acid cleaving domains (i.e., a HNH domain and a RuvC domain).

The site-directed polypeptide can comprise an amino acid sequence comprising at least 15% amino acid identity to a Cas9 from a bacterium (e.g., S. pyogenes), and two nucleic acid cleaving domains, wherein one or both of the nucleic acid cleaving domains comprise at least 50% amino acid identity to a nuclease domain from Cas9 from a bacterium (e.g., S. pyogenes).

The site-directed polypeptide can comprise an amino acid sequence comprising at least 15% amino acid identity to a Cas9 from a bacterium (e.g., S. pyogenes), two nucleic acid cleaving domains (i.e., a HNH domain and a RuvC domain), and non-native sequence (for example, a nuclear localization signal) or a linker linking the site-directed polypeptide to a non-native sequence.

The site-directed polypeptide can comprise an amino acid sequence comprising at least 15% amino acid identity to a Cas9 from a bacterium (e.g., S. pyogenes), two nucleic acid cleaving domains (i.e., a HNH domain and a RuvC domain), wherein the site-directed polypeptide comprises a mutation in one or both of the nucleic acid cleaving domains that reduces the cleaving activity of the nuclease domains by at least 50%.

The site-directed polypeptide can comprise an amino acid sequence comprising at least 15% amino acid identity to a Cas9 from a bacterium (e.g., S. pyogenes), and two nucleic acid cleaving domains (i.e., a HNH domain and a RuvC domain), wherein one of the nuclease domains comprises mutation of aspartic acid 10, and/or wherein one of the nuclease domains can comprise a mutation of histidine 840, and wherein the mutation reduces the cleaving activity of the nuclease domain(s) by at least 50%.

The one or more site-directed polypeptides, e.g. DNA endonucleases, can comprise two nickases that together effect one double-strand break at a specific locus in the genome, or four nickases that together effect or cause two double-strand breaks at specific loci in the genome. Alternatively, one site-directed polypeptide, e.g. DNA endonuclease, can effect or cause one double-strand break at a specific locus in the genome.

Non-limiting examples of Cas9 orthologs from other bacterial strains including but not limited to, Cas proteins identified in Acaryochloris marina MBIC11017; Acetohalobium arabaticum DSM 5501; Acidithiobacillus caldus; Acidithiobacillus ferrooxidans ATCC 23270; Alicyclobacillus acidocaldarius LAA1; Alicyclobacillus acidocaldarius subsp. acidocaldarius DSM 446; Allochromatium vinosum DSM 180; Ammonifex degensii KC4; Anabaena variabilis ATCC 29413; Arthrospira maxima CS-328; Arthrospira platensis str. Paraca; Arthrospira sp. PCC 8005; Bacillus pseudomycoides DSM 12442; Bacillus selenitireducens MLS10; Burkholderiales bacterium 1_1_47; Caldicelulosiruptor becscii DSM 6725; Candidatus Desulforudis audaxviator MP104C; Caldicellulosiruptor hydrothermalis 108; Clostridium phage c-st; Clostridium botulinum A3 str. Loch Maree; Clostridium botulinum Ba4 str. 657; Clostridium difficile QCD-63q42; Crocosphaera watsonii WH 8501; Cyanothece sp. ATCC 51142; Cyanothece sp. CCY0110; Cyanothece sp. PCC 7424; Cyanothece sp. PCC 7822; Exiguobacterium sibiricum 255-15; Finegoldia magna ATCC 29328; Ktedonobacter racemifer DSM 44963; Lactobacillus delbrueckii subsp. bulgaricus PB2003/044-T3-4; Lactobacillus salivarius ATCC 11741; Listeria innocua; Lyngbya sp. PCC 8106; Marinobacter sp. ELB17; Methanohalobium evestigatum Z-7303; Microcystis phage Ma-LMM01; Microcystis aeruginosa NIES-843; Microscilla marina ATCC 23134; Microcoleus chthonoplastes PCC 7420; Neisseria meningitidis; Nitrosococcus halophilus Nc4; Nocardiopsis dassonvillei subsp. dassonvillei DSM 43111; Nodularia spumigena CCY9414; Nostoc sp. PCC 7120; Oscillatoria sp. PCC 6506; Pelotomaculum_thermopropionicum_SI; Petrotoga mobilis SJ95; Polaromonas naphthalenivorans CJ2; Polaromonas sp. JS666; Pseudoalteromonas haloplanktis TAC125; Streptomyces pristinaespiralis ATCC 25486; Streptomyces pristinaespiralis ATCC 25486; Streptococcus thermophilus; Streptomyces viridochromogenes DSM 40736; Streptosporangium roseum DSM 43021; Synechococcus sp. PCC 7335; and Thermosipho africanus TCF52B (Chylinski et al., RNA Biol., 2013; 10(5): 726-737.

In addition to Cas9 orthologs, other Cas9 variants such as fusion proteins of inactive dCas9 and effector domains with different functions can be served as a platform for genetic modulation. Any of the foregoing enzymes can be useful in the present disclosure.

Further examples of endonucleases that can be utilized in the present disclosure are provided in SEQ ID NOs: 1-612. These proteins can be modified before use or can be encoded in a nucleic acid sequence such as a DNA, RNA or mRNA or within a vector construct such as the plasmids or adeno-associated virus (AAV) vectors taught herein. Further, they can be codon optimized.

Although nomenclature is used herein to indicate the species of origin for a given site-directed polypeptide, it is understood that the site-directed polypeptide and/or the nucleic acid encoding the site-directed polypeptide can be modified compared to the sequence occurring in the species of origin. For example, “SpCas9” indicates that the Cas9 gene/protein in question originated in Streptococcus pyogenes and was modified, such as by addition of NLS(s) and/or the performance of codon optimization. For example, “SaCas9” indicates that the Cas9 gene/protein in question originated in Staphylococcus aureus and was modified, such as by addition of NLS(s) and/or the performance of codon optimization.

Genome-Targeting Nucleic Acid

The present disclosure provides a genome-targeting nucleic acid that can direct the activities of an associated polypeptide (e.g., a site-directed polypeptide) to a specific target sequence within a target nucleic acid. The genome-targeting nucleic acid can be an RNA. A genome-targeting RNA is referred to as a “guide RNA” or “gRNA” herein. A guide RNA can comprise at least a spacer sequence that hybridizes to a target nucleic acid sequence of interest, and a CRISPR repeat sequence. In Type II systems, the gRNA also comprises a second RNA called the tracrRNA sequence. In the Type II gRNA, the CRISPR repeat sequence and tracrRNA sequence hybridize to each other to form a duplex. In the Type V gRNA, the crRNA forms a duplex. In both systems, the duplex can bind a site-directed polypeptide, such that the guide RNA and site-direct polypeptide form a complex. The genome-targeting nucleic acid can provide target specificity to the complex by virtue of its association with the site-directed polypeptide. The genome-targeting nucleic acid thus can direct the activity of the site-directed polypeptide.

Exemplary guide RNAs include the spacer sequences in SEQ ID NOs: 5272-5314 of the Sequence Listing (FIG. 2A). The target DNA sequence (5′-3′) (SEQ ID NOs: 5315-5357) can be found in FIG. 2B. The reverse strand of target DNA sequence to which the sgRNA will bind (5′-3′) can be found in FIG. 2C.

Each guide RNA can be designed to include a spacer sequence complementary to its genomic target sequence. For example, each of the spacer sequences in SEQ ID NOs: 5272-5314 of the Sequence Listing can be put into a single RNA chimera or a crRNA (along with a corresponding tracrRNA). See Jinek et al., Science, 337, 816-821 (2012) and Deltcheva et al., Nature, 471, 602-607 (2011).

gRNAs or sgRNAs disclosed herein can associate with a DNA endonuclease to form a ribonucleoprotein complex, which can cause stable edits near the c.2299delG located in exon 13 of the USH2A gene. Changes in DNA sequences (e.g., edits) brought about by this editing can be non-transient.

The genome-targeting nucleic acid can be a double-molecule guide RNA (FIG. 1A). The genome-targeting nucleic acid can be a single-molecule guide RNA (FIG. 1B). The double-molecule guide RNA or single-molecule guide RNA can be modified.

A double-molecule guide RNA can comprise two strands of RNA. The first strand comprises in the 5′ to 3′ direction, an optional spacer extension sequence, a spacer sequence and a minimum CRISPR repeat sequence. The second strand can comprise a minimum tracrRNA sequence (complementary to the minimum CRISPR repeat sequence), a 3′ tracrRNA sequence and an optional tracrRNA extension sequence.

A single-molecule guide RNA (sgRNA) in a Type II system can comprise, in the 5′ to 3′ direction, an optional spacer extension sequence, a spacer sequence, a minimum CRISPR repeat sequence, a single-molecule guide linker, a minimum tracrRNA sequence, a 3′ tracrRNA sequence and an optional tracrRNA extension sequence. The optional tracrRNA extension can comprise elements that contribute additional functionality (e.g., stability) to the guide RNA. The single-molecule guide linker can link the minimum CRISPR repeat and the minimum tracrRNA sequence to form a hairpin structure. The optional tracrRNA extension can comprise one or more hairpins.

The sgRNA can comprise a 24 nucleotide spacer sequence at the 5′ end of the sgRNA sequence. The sgRNA can comprise a 23 nucleotide spacer sequence at the 5′ end of the sgRNA sequence. The sgRNA can comprise a 22 nucleotide spacer sequence at the 5′ end of the sgRNA sequence. The sgRNA can comprise a 21 nucleotide spacer sequence at the 5′ end of the sgRNA sequence. The sgRNA can comprise a 20 nucleotide spacer sequence at the 5′ end of the sgRNA sequence. The sgRNA can comprise a 19 nucleotide spacer sequence at the 5′ end of the sgRNA sequence. The sgRNA can comprise a 18 nucleotide spacer sequence at the 5′ end of the sgRNA sequence. The sgRNA can comprise a 17 nucleotide spacer sequence at the 5′ end of the sgRNA sequence. The sgRNA can comprise a 25 nucleotide spacer sequence at the 5′end of the sgRNA sequence. The sgRNA can comprise a 26 nucleotide spacer sequence at the 5′end of the sgRNA sequence. The sgRNA can comprise a 27 nucleotide spacer sequence at the 5′end of the sgRNA sequence. The sgRNA can comprise a 28 nucleotide spacer sequence at the 5′end of the sgRNA sequence. The sgRNA can comprise a 29 nucleotide spacer sequence at the 5′end of the sgRNA sequence. The sgRNA can comprise a 30 nucleotide spacer sequence at the 5′ end of the sgRNA sequence. The sgRNA can comprise a less than a 20 nucleotide spacer sequence at the 5′ end of the sgRNA sequence. The sgRNA can comprise a more than 20 nucleotide spacer sequence at the 5′ end of the sgRNA sequence. The sgRNA can comprise a variable length spacer sequence with 17-24 nucleotides at the 5′ end of the sgRNA sequence. The sgRNA can comprise a variable length spacer sequence with 17-30 nucleotides at the 5′ end of the sgRNA sequence (see Table 2).

The sgRNA can comprise no uracil at the 3′end of the sgRNA sequence, such as in SEQ ID NO: 5268 of Table 2. The sgRNA can comprise one or more uracil at the 3′end of the sgRNA sequence, such as in SEQ ID NO: 5269 in Table 2. For example, the sgRNA can comprise 1 uracil (U) at the 3′ end of the sgRNA sequence. The sgRNA can comprise 2 uracil (UU) at the 3′ end of the sgRNA sequence. The sgRNA can comprise 3 uracil (UUU) at the 3′ end of the sgRNA sequence. The sgRNA can comprise 4 uracil (UUUU) at the 3′ end of the sgRNA sequence. The sgRNA can comprise 5 uracil (UUUUU) at the 3′ end of the sgRNA sequence. The sgRNA can comprise 6 uracil (UUUUUU) at the 3′ end of the sgRNA sequence. The sgRNA can comprise 7 uracil (UUUUUUU) at the 3′ end of the sgRNA sequence. The sgRNA can comprise 8 uracil (UUUUUUUU) at the 3′ end of the sgRNA sequence.

The sgRNA can be unmodified or modified. For example, modified sgRNAs can comprise one or more 2′-O-methyl phosphorothioate nucleotides.

TABLE 2 SEQ ID NO. sgRNA sequence 5267 nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnguuuuagagcuagaaauag caaguuaaaauaaggcuaguccguuaucaacuugaaaaa guggcaccgagucggugcuuuu 5268 nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnguuuuagagcuagaaauag caaguuaaaauaaggcuaguccguuaucaacuugaaaaa guggcaccgagucggugc 5269 n₍₁₇₋₃₀₎guuuuagagcuagaaauagcaaguuaaaauaag gcuaguccguuaucaacuugaaaaaguggcaccgagucg gugcu₍₁₋₈₎

A single-molecule guide RNA (sgRNA) in a Type V system can comprise, in the 5′ to 3′ direction, a minimum CRISPR repeat sequence and a spacer sequence.

By way of illustration, guide RNAs used in the CRISPR/Cas/Cpf1 system, or other smaller RNAs can be readily synthesized by chemical means, as illustrated below and described in the art. While chemical synthetic procedures are continually expanding, purifications of such RNAs by procedures such as high performance liquid chromatography (HPLC, which avoids the use of gels such as PAGE) tends to become more challenging as polynucleotide lengths increase significantly beyond a hundred or so nucleotides. One approach used for generating RNAs of greater length is to produce two or more molecules that are ligated together. Much longer RNAs, such as those encoding a Cas9 or Cpf1 endonuclease, are more readily generated enzymatically. Various types of RNA modifications can be introduced during or after chemical synthesis and/or enzymatic generation of RNAs, e.g., modifications that enhance stability, reduce the likelihood or degree of innate immune response, and/or enhance other attributes, as described in the art.

Spacer Extension Sequence

In some examples of genome-targeting nucleic acids, a spacer extension sequence can modify activity, provide stability and/or provide a location for modifications of a genome-targeting nucleic acid. A spacer extension sequence can modify on- or off-target activity or specificity. In some examples, a spacer extension sequence can be provided. The spacer extension sequence can have a length of more than 1, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 120, 140, 160, 180, 200, 220, 240, 260, 280, 300, 320, 340, 360, 380, 400, 1000, 2000, 3000, 4000, 5000, 6000, or 7000 or more nucleotides. The spacer extension sequence can have a length of less than 1, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 120, 140, 160, 180, 200, 220, 240, 260, 280, 300, 320, 340, 360, 380, 400, 1000, 2000, 3000, 4000, 5000, 6000, 7000 or more nucleotides. The spacer extension sequence can be less than 10 nucleotides in length. The spacer extension sequence can be between 10-30 nucleotides in length. The spacer extension sequence can be between 30-70 nucleotides in length.

The spacer extension sequence can comprise another moiety (e.g., a stability control sequence, an endoribonuclease binding sequence, a ribozyme). The moiety can decrease or increase the stability of a nucleic acid targeting nucleic acid. The moiety can be a transcriptional terminator segment (i.e., a transcription termination sequence). The moiety can function in a eukaryotic cell. The moiety can function in a prokaryotic cell. The moiety can function in both eukaryotic and prokaryotic cells. Non-limiting examples of suitable moieties include: a 5′ cap (e.g., a 7-methylguanylate cap (m7 G)), a riboswitch sequence (e.g., to allow for regulated stability and/or regulated accessibility by proteins and protein complexes), a sequence that forms a dsRNA duplex (i.e., a hairpin), a sequence that targets the RNA to a subcellular location (e.g., nucleus, mitochondria, chloroplasts, and the like), a modification or sequence that provides for tracking (e.g., direct conjugation to a fluorescent molecule, conjugation to a moiety that facilitates fluorescent detection, a sequence that allows for fluorescent detection, etc.), and/or a modification or sequence that provides a binding site for proteins (e.g., proteins that act on DNA, including transcriptional activators, transcriptional repressors, DNA methyltransferases, DNA demethylases, histone acetyltransferases, histone deacetylases, and the like).

Spacer Sequence

The spacer sequence hybridizes to a sequence in a target nucleic acid of interest. The spacer of a genome-targeting nucleic acid can interact with a target nucleic acid in a sequence-specific manner via hybridization (i.e., base pairing). The nucleotide sequence of the spacer can vary depending on the sequence of the target nucleic acid of interest.

In a CRISPR/Cas system herein, the spacer sequence can be designed to hybridize to a target nucleic acid that is located 5′ of a PAM of the Cas9 enzyme used in the system. The spacer can perfectly match the target sequence or can have mismatches. Each Cas9 enzyme has a particular PAM sequence that it recognizes in a target DNA. For example, S. pyogenes recognizes in a target nucleic acid a PAM that comprises the sequence 5′-NRG-3′, where R comprises either A or G, where N is any nucleotide and N is immediately 3′ of the target nucleic acid sequence targeted by the spacer sequence. For example, S. aureus Cas9 recognizes in a target nucleic acid a PAM that comprises the sequence 5′-NNGRRT-3′, where R comprises either A or G, where N is any nucleotide and N is immediately 3′ of the target nucleic acid sequence targeted by the spacer sequence. In certain examples, S. aureus Cas9 recognizes in a target nucleic acid a PAM that comprises the sequence 5′-NNGRRN-3′, where R comprises either A or G, where N is any nucleotide and the N is immediately 3′ of the target nucleic acid sequence targeted by the spacer sequence. For example, C. jejuni recognizes in a target nucleic acid a PAM that comprises the sequence 5′-NNNNACA-3′ or 5′-NNNNACAC-3′, where N is any nucleotide and N is immediately 3′ of the target nucleic acid sequence targeted by the spacer sequence. In certain examples, C. jejuni Cas9 recognizes in a target nucleic acid a PAM that comprises the sequence 5′-NNNVRYM-3′ or 5′-NNVRYAC-3′, where V comprises either A, G or C, where R comprises either A or G, where Y comprises either C or T, where M comprises A or C, where N is any nucleotide and the N is immediately 3′ of the target nucleic acid sequence targeted by the spacer sequence.

The target nucleic acid sequence can comprise 20 nucleotides. The target nucleic acid can comprise less than 20 nucleotides. The target nucleic acid can comprise more than 20 nucleotides. The target nucleic acid can comprise at least: 5, 10, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 30 or more nucleotides. The target nucleic acid can comprise at most: 5, 10, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 30 or more nucleotides. The target nucleic acid sequence can comprise 20 bases immediately 5′ of the first nucleotide of the PAM. For example, in a sequence comprising 5′-NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNRG-3′ (SEQ ID NO: 5270), the target nucleic acid can comprise the sequence that corresponds to the Ns, wherein N is any nucleotide, and the underlined NRG sequence is the S. pyogenes PAM.

The spacer sequence that hybridizes to the target nucleic acid can have a length of at least about 6 nucleotides (nt). The spacer sequence can be at least about 6 nt, at least about 10 nt, at least about 15 nt, at least about 18 nt, at least about 19 nt, at least about 20 nt, at least about 25 nt, at least about 30 nt, at least about 35 nt or at least about 40 nt, from about 6 nt to about 80 nt, from about 6 nt to about 50 nt, from about 6 nt to about 45 nt, from about 6 nt to about 40 nt, from about 6 nt to about 35 nt, from about 6 nt to about 30 nt, from about 6 nt to about 25 nt, from about 6 nt to about 20 nt, from about 6 nt to about 19 nt, from about 10 nt to about 50 nt, from about 10 nt to about 45 nt, from about 10 nt to about 40 nt, from about 10 nt to about 35 nt, from about 10 nt to about 30 nt, from about 10 nt to about 25 nt, from about 10 nt to about 20 nt, from about 10 nt to about 19 nt, from about 19 nt to about 25 nt, from about 19 nt to about 30 nt, from about 19 nt to about 35 nt, from about 19 nt to about 40 nt, from about 19 nt to about 45 nt, from about 19 nt to about 50 nt, from about 19 nt to about 60 nt, from about 20 nt to about 25 nt, from about 20 nt to about 30 nt, from about 20 nt to about 35 nt, from about 20 nt to about 40 nt, from about 20 nt to about 45 nt, from about 20 nt to about 50 nt, or from about 20 nt to about 60 nt. In some examples, the spacer sequence can comprise 24 nucleotides. In some examples, the spacer sequence can comprise 23 nucleotides. In some examples, the spacer sequence can comprise 22 nucleotides. In some examples, the spacer sequence can comprise 21 nucleotides. In some examples, the spacer sequence can comprise 20 nucleotides. In some examples, the spacer sequence can comprise 19 nucleotides. In some examples, the spacer sequence can comprise 18 nucleotides. In some examples, the spacer sequence can comprise 17 nucleotides.

In some examples, the percent complementarity between the spacer sequence and the target nucleic acid is at least about 30%, at least about 40%, at least about 50%, at least about 60%, at least about 65%, at least about 70%, at least about 75%, at least about 80%, at least about 85%, at least about 90%, at least about 95%, at least about 97%, at least about 98%, at least about 99%, or 100%. In some examples, the percent complementarity between the spacer sequence and the target nucleic acid is at most about 30%, at most about 40%, at most about 50%, at most about 60%, at most about 65%, at most about 70%, at most about 75%, at most about 80%, at most about 85%, at most about 90%, at most about 95%, at most about 97%, at most about 98%, at most about 99%, or 100%. In some examples, the percent complementarity between the spacer sequence and the target nucleic acid is 100% over the six contiguous 5′-most nucleotides of the target sequence of the complementary strand of the target nucleic acid. The percent complementarity between the spacer sequence and the target nucleic acid can be at least 60% over about 20 contiguous nucleotides. The length of the spacer sequence and the target nucleic acid can differ by 1 to 6 nucleotides, which can be thought of as a bulge or bulges.

The spacer sequence can be designed or chosen using a computer program. The computer program can use variables, such as predicted melting temperature, secondary structure formation, predicted annealing temperature, sequence identity, genomic context, chromatin accessibility, % GC, frequency of genomic occurrence (e.g., of sequences that are identical or are similar but vary in one or more spots as a result of mismatch, insertion or deletion), methylation status, presence of SNPs, and the like.

Minimum CRISPR Repeat Sequence

A minimum CRISPR repeat sequence can be a sequence with at least about 30%, about 40%, about 50%, about 60%, about 65%, about 70%, about 75%, about 80%, about 85%, about 90%, about 95%, or 100% sequence identity to a reference CRISPR repeat sequence (e.g., crRNA from S. pyogenes).

A minimum CRISPR repeat sequence can comprise nucleotides that can hybridize to a minimum tracrRNA sequence in a cell. The minimum CRISPR repeat sequence and a minimum tracrRNA sequence can form a duplex, i.e. a base-paired double-stranded structure. Together, the minimum CRISPR repeat sequence and the minimum tracrRNA sequence can bind to the site-directed polypeptide. At least a part of the minimum CRISPR repeat sequence can hybridize to the minimum tracrRNA sequence. At least a part of the minimum CRISPR repeat sequence can comprise at least about 30%, about 40%, about 50%, about 60%, about 65%, about 70%, about 75%, about 80%, about 85%, about 90%, about 95%, or 100% complementary to the minimum tracrRNA sequence. At least a part of the minimum CRISPR repeat sequence can comprise at most about 30%, about 40%, about 50%, about 60%, about 65%, about 70%, about 75%, about 80%, about 85%, about 90%, about 95%, or 100% complementary to the minimum tracrRNA sequence.

The minimum CRISPR repeat sequence can have a length from about 7 nucleotides to about 100 nucleotides. For example, the length of the minimum CRISPR repeat sequence is from about 7 nucleotides (nt) to about 50 nt, from about 7 nt to about 40 nt, from about 7 nt to about 30 nt, from about 7 nt to about 25 nt, from about 7 nt to about 20 nt, from about 7 nt to about 15 nt, from about 8 nt to about 40 nt, from about 8 nt to about 30 nt, from about 8 nt to about 25 nt, from about 8 nt to about 20 nt, from about 8 nt to about 15 nt, from about 15 nt to about 100 nt, from about 15 nt to about 80 nt, from about 15 nt to about 50 nt, from about 15 nt to about 40 nt, from about 15 nt to about 30 nt, or from about 15 nt to about 25 nt. In some examples, the minimum CRISPR repeat sequence can be approximately 9 nucleotides in length. The minimum CRISPR repeat sequence can be approximately 12 nucleotides in length.

The minimum CRISPR repeat sequence can be at least about 60% identical to a reference minimum CRISPR repeat sequence (e.g., wild-type crRNA from S. pyogenes) over a stretch of at least 6, 7, or 8 contiguous nucleotides. For example, the minimum CRISPR repeat sequence can be at least about 65% identical, at least about 70% identical, at least about 75% identical, at least about 80% identical, at least about 85% identical, at least about 90% identical, at least about 95% identical, at least about 98% identical, at least about 99% identical or 100% identical to a reference minimum CRISPR repeat sequence over a stretch of at least 6, 7, or 8 contiguous nucleotides.

Minimum tracrRNA Sequence

A minimum tracrRNA sequence can be a sequence with at least about 30%, about 40%, about 50%, about 60%, about 65%, about 70%, about 75%, about 80%, about 85%, about 90%, about 95%, or 100% sequence identity to a reference tracrRNA sequence (e.g., wild type tracrRNA from S. pyogenes).

A minimum tracrRNA sequence can comprise nucleotides that hybridize to a minimum CRISPR repeat sequence in a cell. A minimum tracrRNA sequence and a minimum CRISPR repeat sequence form a duplex, i.e. a base-paired double-stranded structure. Together, the minimum tracrRNA sequence and the minimum CRISPR repeat can bind to a site-directed polypeptide. At least a part of the minimum tracrRNA sequence can hybridize to the minimum CRISPR repeat sequence. The minimum tracrRNA sequence can be at least about 30%, about 40%, about 50%, about 60%, about 65%, about 70%, about 75%, about 80%, about 85%, about 90%, about 95%, or 100% complementary to the minimum CRISPR repeat sequence.

The minimum tracrRNA sequence can have a length from about 7 nucleotides to about 100 nucleotides. For example, the minimum tracrRNA sequence can be from about 7 nucleotides (nt) to about 50 nt, from about 7 nt to about 40 nt, from about 7 nt to about 30 nt, from about 7 nt to about 25 nt, from about 7 nt to about 20 nt, from about 7 nt to about 15 nt, from about 8 nt to about 40 nt, from about 8 nt to about 30 nt, from about 8 nt to about 25 nt, from about 8 nt to about 20 nt, from about 8 nt to about 15 nt, from about 15 nt to about 100 nt, from about 15 nt to about 80 nt, from about 15 nt to about 50 nt, from about 15 nt to about 40 nt, from about 15 nt to about 30 nt or from about 15 nt to about 25 nt long. The minimum tracrRNA sequence can be approximately 9 nucleotides in length. The minimum tracrRNA sequence can be approximately 12 nucleotides. The minimum tracrRNA can consist of tracrRNA nt 23-48 described in Jinek et al., supra.

The minimum tracrRNA sequence can be at least about 60% identical to a reference minimum tracrRNA (e.g., wild type, tracrRNA from S. pyogenes) sequence over a stretch of at least 6, 7, or 8 contiguous nucleotides. For example, the minimum tracrRNA sequence can be at least about 65% identical, about 70% identical, about 75% identical, about 80% identical, about 85% identical, about 90% identical, about 95% identical, about 98% identical, about 99% identical or 100% identical to a reference minimum tracrRNA sequence over a stretch of at least 6, 7, or 8 contiguous nucleotides.

The duplex between the minimum CRISPR RNA and the minimum tracrRNA can comprise a double helix. The duplex between the minimum CRISPR RNA and the minimum tracrRNA can comprise at least about 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 or more nucleotides. The duplex between the minimum CRISPR RNA and the minimum tracrRNA can comprise at most about 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 or more nucleotides.

The duplex can comprise a mismatch (i.e., the two strands of the duplex are not 100% complementary). The duplex can comprise at least about 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 or mismatches. The duplex can comprise at most about 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 or mismatches. The duplex can comprise no more than 2 mismatches.

Bulges

In some cases, there can be a “bulge” in the duplex between the minimum CRISPR RNA and the minimum tracrRNA. A bulge is an unpaired region of nucleotides within the duplex. A bulge can contribute to the binding of the duplex to the site-directed polypeptide. The bulge can comprise, on one side of the duplex, an unpaired 5′-XXXY-3′ where X is any purine and Y comprises a nucleotide that can form a wobble pair with a nucleotide on the opposite strand, and an unpaired nucleotide region on the other side of the duplex. The number of unpaired nucleotides on the two sides of the duplex can be different.

In one example, the bulge can comprise an unpaired purine (e.g., adenine) on the minimum CRISPR repeat strand of the bulge. In some examples, the bulge can comprise an unpaired 5′-AAGY-3′ of the minimum tracrRNA sequence strand of the bulge, where Y comprises a nucleotide that can form a wobble pairing with a nucleotide on the minimum CRISPR repeat strand.

A bulge on the minimum CRISPR repeat side of the duplex can comprise at least 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 or more unpaired nucleotides. A bulge on the minimum CRISPR repeat side of the duplex can comprise at most 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 or more unpaired nucleotides. A bulge on the minimum CRISPR repeat side of the duplex can comprise 1 unpaired nucleotide.

A bulge on the minimum tracrRNA sequence side of the duplex can comprise at least 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 or more unpaired nucleotides. A bulge on the minimum tracrRNA sequence side of the duplex can comprise at most 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 or more unpaired nucleotides. A bulge on a second side of the duplex (e.g., the minimum tracrRNA sequence side of the duplex) can comprise 4 unpaired nucleotides.

A bulge can comprise at least one wobble pairing. In some examples, a bulge can comprise at most one wobble pairing. A bulge can comprise at least one purine nucleotide. A bulge can comprise at least 3 purine nucleotides. A bulge sequence can comprise at least 5 purine nucleotides. A bulge sequence can comprise at least one guanine nucleotide. In some examples, a bulge sequence can comprise at least one adenine nucleotide.

Hairpins

In various examples, one or more hairpins can be located 3′ to the minimum tracrRNA in the 3′ tracrRNA sequence.

The hairpin can start at least about 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 15, or 20 or more nucleotides 3′ from the last paired nucleotide in the minimum CRISPR repeat and minimum tracrRNA sequence duplex. The hairpin can start at most about 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 or 10 or more nucleotides 3′ of the last paired nucleotide in the minimum CRISPR repeat and minimum tracrRNA sequence duplex.

The hairpin can comprise at least about 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 15, or 20 or more consecutive nucleotides. The hairpin can comprise at most about 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 15, or more consecutive nucleotides.

The hairpin can comprise a CC dinucleotide (i.e., two consecutive cytosine nucleotides).

The hairpin can comprise duplexed nucleotides (e.g., nucleotides in a hairpin, hybridized together). For example, a hairpin can comprise a CC dinucleotide that is hybridized to a GG dinucleotide in a hairpin duplex of the 3′ tracrRNA sequence.

One or more of the hairpins can interact with guide RNA-interacting regions of a site-directed polypeptide.

In some examples, there are two or more hairpins, and in other examples there are three or more hairpins.

3′ tracrRNA Sequence

A 3′ tracrRNA sequence can comprise a sequence with at least about 30%, about 40%, about 50%, about 60%, about 65%, about 70%, about 75%, about 80%, about 85%, about 90%, about 95%, or 100% sequence identity to a reference tracrRNA sequence (e.g., a tracrRNA from S. pyogenes).

The 3′ tracrRNA sequence can have a length from about 6 nucleotides to about 100 nucleotides. For example, the 3′ tracrRNA sequence can have a length from about 6 nucleotides (nt) to about 50 nt, from about 6 nt to about 40 nt, from about 6 nt to about 30 nt, from about 6 nt to about 25 nt, from about 6 nt to about 20 nt, from about 6 nt to about 15 nt, from about 8 nt to about 40 nt, from about 8 nt to about 30 nt, from about 8 nt to about 25 nt, from about 8 nt to about 20 nt, from about 8 nt to about 15 nt, from about 15 nt to about 100 nt, from about 15 nt to about 80 nt, from about 15 nt to about 50 nt, from about 15 nt to about 40 nt, from about 15 nt to about 30 nt, or from about 15 nt to about 25 nt. The 3′ tracrRNA sequence can have a length of approximately 14 nucleotides.

The 3′ tracrRNA sequence can be at least about 60% identical to a reference 3′ tracrRNA sequence (e.g., wild type 3′ tracrRNA sequence from S. pyogenes) over a stretch of at least 6, 7, or 8 contiguous nucleotides. For example, the 3′ tracrRNA sequence can be at least about 60% identical, about 65% identical, about 70% identical, about 75% identical, about 80% identical, about 85% identical, about 90% identical, about 95% identical, about 98% identical, about 99% identical, or 100% identical, to a reference 3′ tracrRNA sequence (e.g., wild type 3′ tracrRNA sequence from S. pyogenes) over a stretch of at least 6, 7, or 8 contiguous nucleotides.

The 3′ tracrRNA sequence can comprise more than one duplexed region (e.g., hairpin, hybridized region). The 3′ tracrRNA sequence can comprise two duplexed regions.

The 3′ tracrRNA sequence can comprise a stem loop structure. The stem loop structure in the 3′ tracrRNA can comprise at least 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 15 or 20 or more nucleotides. The stem loop structure in the 3′ tracrRNA can comprise at most 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 or 10 or more nucleotides. The stem loop structure can comprise a functional moiety. For example, the stem loop structure can comprise an aptamer, a ribozyme, a protein-interacting hairpin, a CRISPR array, an intron, or an exon. The stem loop structure can comprise at least about 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 or more functional moieties. The stem loop structure can comprise at most about 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 or more functional moieties.

The hairpin in the 3′ tracrRNA sequence can comprise a P-domain. In some examples, the P-domain can comprise a double-stranded region in the hairpin.

tracrRNA Extension Sequence

A tracrRNA extension sequence can be provided whether the tracrRNA is in the context of single-molecule guides or double-molecule guides. The tracrRNA extension sequence can have a length from about 1 nucleotide to about 400 nucleotides. The tracrRNA extension sequence can have a length of more than 1, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 120, 140, 160, 180, 200, 220, 240, 260, 280, 300, 320, 340, 360, 380, or 400 nucleotides. The tracrRNA extension sequence can have a length from about 20 to about 5000 or more nucleotides. The tracrRNA extension sequence can have a length of more than 1000 nucleotides. The tracrRNA extension sequence can have a length of less than 1, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 120, 140, 160, 180, 200, 220, 240, 260, 280, 300, 320, 340, 360, 380, 400 or more nucleotides. The tracrRNA extension sequence can have a length of less than 1000 nucleotides. The tracrRNA extension sequence can comprise less than 10 nucleotides in length. The tracrRNA extension sequence can be 10-30 nucleotides in length. The tracrRNA extension sequence can be 30-70 nucleotides in length.

The tracrRNA extension sequence can comprise a functional moiety (e.g., a stability control sequence, ribozyme, endoribonuclease binding sequence). The functional moiety can comprise a transcriptional terminator segment (i.e., a transcription termination sequence). The functional moiety can have a total length from about 10 nucleotides (nt) to about 100 nucleotides, from about 10 nt to about 20 nt, from about 20 nt to about 30 nt, from about 30 nt to about 40 nt, from about 40 nt to about 50 nt, from about 50 nt to about 60 nt, from about 60 nt to about 70 nt, from about 70 nt to about 80 nt, from about 80 nt to about 90 nt, or from about 90 nt to about 100 nt, from about 15 nt to about 80 nt, from about 15 nt to about 50 nt, from about 15 nt to about 40 nt, from about 15 nt to about 30 nt, or from about 15 nt to about 25 nt. The functional moiety can function in a eukaryotic cell. The functional moiety can function in a prokaryotic cell. The functional moiety can function in both eukaryotic and prokaryotic cells.

Non-limiting examples of suitable tracrRNA extension functional moieties include a 3′ poly-adenylated tail, a riboswitch sequence (e.g., to allow for regulated stability and/or regulated accessibility by proteins and protein complexes), a sequence that forms a dsRNA duplex (i.e., a hairpin), a sequence that targets the RNA to a subcellular location (e.g., nucleus, mitochondria, chloroplasts, and the like), a modification or sequence that provides for tracking (e.g., direct conjugation to a fluorescent molecule, conjugation to a moiety that facilitates fluorescent detection, a sequence that allows for fluorescent detection, etc.), and/or a modification or sequence that provides a binding site for proteins (e.g., proteins that act on DNA, including transcriptional activators, transcriptional repressors, DNA methyltransferases, DNA demethylases, histone acetyltransferases, histone deacetylases, and the like). The tracrRNA extension sequence can comprise a primer binding site or a molecular index (e.g., barcode sequence). The tracrRNA extension sequence can comprise one or more affinity tags.

Single-Molecule Guide Linker Sequence

The linker sequence of a single-molecule guide nucleic acid can have a length from about 3 nucleotides to about 100 nucleotides. In Jinek et al., supra, for example, a simple 4 nucleotide “tetraloop” (-GAAA-) was used, Science, 337(6096):816-821 (2012). An illustrative linker has a length from about 3 nucleotides (nt) to about 90 nt, from about 3 nt to about 80 nt, from about 3 nt to about 70 nt, from about 3 nt to about 60 nt, from about 3 nt to about 50 nt, from about 3 nt to about 40 nt, from about 3 nt to about 30 nt, from about 3 nt to about 20 nt, from about 3 nt to about 10 nt. For example, the linker can have a length from about 3 nt to about 5 nt, from about 5 nt to about 10 nt, from about 10 nt to about 15 nt, from about 15 nt to about 20 nt, from about 20 nt to about 25 nt, from about 25 nt to about 30 nt, from about 30 nt to about 35 nt, from about 35 nt to about 40 nt, from about 40 nt to about 50 nt, from about 50 nt to about 60 nt, from about 60 nt to about 70 nt, from about 70 nt to about 80 nt, from about 80 nt to about 90 nt, or from about 90 nt to about 100 nt. The linker of a single-molecule guide nucleic acid can be between 4 and 40 nucleotides. The linker can be at least about 100, 500, 1000, 1500, 2000, 2500, 3000, 3500, 4000, 4500, 5000, 5500, 6000, 6500, or 7000 or more nucleotides. The linker can be at most about 100, 500, 1000, 1500, 2000, 2500, 3000, 3500, 4000, 4500, 5000, 5500, 6000, 6500, or 7000 or more nucleotides.

Linkers can comprise any of a variety of sequences, although in some examples the linker will not comprise sequences that have extensive regions of homology with other portions of the guide RNA, which might cause intramolecular binding that could interfere with other functional regions of the guide. In Jinek et al., supra, a simple 4 nucleotide sequence -GAAA- was used, Science, 337(6096):816-821 (2012), but numerous other sequences, including longer sequences can likewise be used.

The linker sequence can comprise a functional moiety. For example, the linker sequence can comprise one or more features, including an aptamer, a ribozyme, a protein-interacting hairpin, a protein binding site, a CRISPR array, an intron, or an exon. The linker sequence can comprise at least about 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 or more functional moieties. In some examples, the linker sequence can comprise at most about 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 or more functional moieties.

Complexes of a Genome-Targeting Nucleic Acid and a Site-Directed Polypeptide

A genome-targeting nucleic acid interacts with a site-directed polypeptide (e.g., a nucleic acid-guided nuclease such as Cas9), thereby forming a complex. The genome-targeting nucleic acid guides the site-directed polypeptide to a target nucleic acid.

Ribonucleoprotein Complexes (RNPs)

The site-directed polypeptide and genome-targeting nucleic acid can each be administered separately to a cell or a patient. On the other hand, the site-directed polypeptide can be pre-complexed with one or more guide RNAs, or one or more crRNA together with a tracrRNA. The site-directed polypeptide can be pre-complexed with one or more sgRNA. The pre-complexed material can then be administered to a cell or a patient. Such pre-complexed material is known as a ribonucleoprotein particle (RNP). The site-directed polypeptide in the RNP can be, for example, a Cas9 endonuclease or a Cpf1 endonuclease. The site-directed polypeptide can be flanked at the N-terminus, the C-terminus, or both the N-terminus and C-terminus by one or more nuclear localization signals (NLSs). For example, a Cas9 endonuclease can be flanked by two NLSs, one NLS located at the N-terminus and the second NLS located at the C-terminus. The NLS can be any NLS known in the art, such as a SV40 NLS. The weight ratio of genome-targeting nucleic acid to site-directed polypeptide in the RNP can be 1:1. For example, the weight ratio of sgRNA to Cas9 endonuclease in the RNP can be 1:1.

Target Sequence Selection

Shifts in the location of the 5′ boundary and/or the 3′ boundary relative to particular reference loci can be used to facilitate or enhance particular applications of gene editing, which depend in part on the endonuclease system selected for the editing, as further described and illustrated herein.

In a first non-limiting example of such target sequence selection, many endonuclease systems have rules or criteria that can guide the initial selection of potential target sites for cleavage, such as the requirement of a PAM sequence motif in a particular position adjacent to the DNA cleavage sites in the case of CRISPR Type II or Type V endonucleases.

In another nonlimiting example of target sequence selection or optimization, the frequency of off-target activity for a particular combination of target sequence and gene editing endonuclease can be assessed relative to the frequency of on-target activity. In some cases, cells that have been correctly edited at the desired locus can have a selective advantage relative to other cells. Illustrative, but nonlimiting, examples of a selective advantage include the acquisition of attributes such as enhanced rates of replication, persistence, resistance to certain conditions, enhanced rates of successful engraftment or persistence in vivo following introduction into a patient, and other attributes associated with the maintenance or increased numbers or viability of such cells. In other cases, cells that have been correctly edited at the desired locus can be positively selected for by one or more screening methods used to identify, sort or otherwise select for cells that have been correctly edited. Both selective advantage and directed selection methods can take advantage of the phenotype associated with the correction. In some cases, cells can be edited two or more times in order to create a second modification that creates a new phenotype that is used to select or purify the intended population of cells. Such a second modification could be created by adding a second gRNA for a selectable or screenable marker. In some cases, cells can be correctly edited at the desired locus using a DNA fragment that contains the cDNA and also a selectable marker.

Whether any selective advantage is applicable or any directed selection is to be applied in a particular case, target sequence selection can also be guided by consideration of off-target frequencies in order to enhance the effectiveness of the application and/or reduce the potential for undesired alterations at sites other than the desired target. As described further and illustrated herein and in the art, the occurrence of off-target activity can be influenced by a number of factors including similarities and dissimilarities between the target site and various off-target sites, as well as the particular endonuclease used. Bioinformatics tools are available that assist in the prediction of off-target activity, and frequently such tools can also be used to identify the most likely sites of off-target activity, which can then be assessed in experimental settings to evaluate relative frequencies of off-target to on-target activity, thereby allowing the selection of sequences that have higher relative on-target activities. Illustrative examples of such techniques are provided herein, and others are known in the art.

gRNAs of the present disclosure can direct editing at a genetic locus where editing is desired (e.g., near the c.2299delG located in exon 13 of the USH2A gene). As used herein, “on-target editing,” “on-target activity,” or “on-target cleavage” means editing at a genetic location where editing is desired. gRNAs disclosed herein can have on-target activity when the gRNA directs editing at a genetic location near the c.2299delG located in exon 13 of the USH2A gene.

gRNAs of the present disclosure can also direct editing at a genetic locus where editing is not desired. As used herein, “off-target editing,” “off-target activity,” or “off-target cleavage” means editing at a genetic locus where editing is not desired.

Off-target editing can be editing of a second gene or locus (e.g., editing of a genomic sequence that is not a sequence of the USH2A gene or a regulatory sequence of the USH2A gene). Herein, this type of off-target editing is termed “genomic off-target editing,” “genomic off-target activity,” or “genomic off-target cleavage.” gRNAs disclosed herein have genomic off-target activity when the gRNA directs editing of a genomic sequence that is not a sequence of the USH2A gene or a regulatory sequence of the USH2A gene.

In some examples, genomic off-target activity of a gRNA can be “minimal.” gRNAs with minimal genomic off-target activity can be determined based on in silico analysis, in vitro methods, or in vivo methods of determining the amount of genomic off-target editing caused by a gRNA. A gRNA with minimal genomic off-target activity can cause at least one instance of genomic off-target editing in 30% or less of cells such as, for example, 25% or less of cells, 20% or less of cells, 15% or less of cells 10% or less of cells, 5% or less of cells, 4% or less of cells, 3% or less of cells, 2% or less of cells, 1% or less of cells, 0.5% or less of cells, 0.25% or less of cells, or 0.1% or less of cells. Such determinations can, in some cases, be determined using in vitro systems.

Another aspect of target sequence selection relates to homologous recombination events. Sequences sharing regions of homology can serve as focal points for homologous recombination events that result in deletion of intervening sequences. Such recombination events occur during the normal course of replication of chromosomes and other DNA sequences, and also at other times when DNA sequences are being synthesized, such as in the case of repairs of double-strand breaks (DSBs), which occur on a regular basis during the normal cell replication cycle but can also be enhanced by the occurrence of various events (such as UV light and other inducers of DNA breakage) or the presence of certain agents (such as various chemical inducers). Many such inducers cause DSBs to occur indiscriminately in the genome, and DSBs can be regularly induced and repaired in normal cells. During repair, the original sequence can be reconstructed with complete fidelity, however, in some cases, small insertions or deletions (referred to as “indels”) are introduced at the DSB site.

DSBs can also be specifically induced at particular locations, as in the case of the endonucleases systems described herein, which can be used to cause directed or preferential gene modification events at selected chromosomal locations. The tendency for homologous sequences to be subject to recombination in the context of DNA repair (as well as replication) can be taken advantage of in a number of circumstances, and is the basis for one application of gene editing systems, such as CRISPR, in which homology directed repair is used to insert a sequence of interest, provided through use of a “donor” polynucleotide, into a desired chromosomal location.

Regions of homology between particular sequences, which can be small regions of “microhomology” that can comprise as few as ten base pairs or less, can also be used to bring about desired deletions. For example, a single DSB can be introduced at a site that exhibits microhomology with a nearby sequence. During the normal course of repair of such DSB, a result that occurs with high frequency is the deletion of the intervening sequence as a result of recombination being facilitated by the DSB and concomitant cellular repair process.

In some circumstances, however, selecting target sequences within regions of homology can also give rise to much larger deletions, including gene fusions (when the deletions are in coding regions), which may or may not be desired given the particular circumstances.

The examples provided herein further illustrate the selection of various target regions for the creation of DSBs designed to induce replacements that result in restoration of usherin protein function, as well as the selection of specific target sequences within such regions that are designed to minimize off-target events relative to on-target events.

Homology Direct Repair (HDR)/Donor Nucleotides

Homology direct repair is a cellular mechanism for repairing double-stranded breaks (DSBs). The most common form is homologous recombination. There are additional pathways for HDR, including single-strand annealing and alternative-HDR. Genome engineering tools allow researchers to manipulate the cellular homologous recombination pathways to create site-specific modifications to the genome. It has been found that cells can repair a double-stranded break using a synthetic donor molecule provided in trans. Therefore, by introducing a double-stranded break near a specific mutation and providing a suitable donor, targeted changes can be made in the genome. Specific cleavage increases the rate of HDR more than 1,000 fold above the rate of 1 in 10⁶ cells receiving a homologous donor alone. The rate of HDR at a particular nucleotide is a function of the distance to the cut site, so choosing overlapping or nearest target sites is important. Gene editing offers the advantage over gene addition, as correcting in situ leaves the rest of the genome unperturbed.

Supplied donors for editing by HDR vary markedly but can contain the intended sequence with small or large flanking homology arms to allow annealing to the genomic DNA. The homology regions flanking the introduced genetic changes can be 30 bp or smaller, or as large as a multi-kilobase cassette that can contain promoters, cDNAs, etc. Both single-stranded and double-stranded oligonucleotide donors have been used. These oligonucleotides range in size from less than 100 nt to over many kb, though longer ssDNA can also be generated and used. Double-stranded donors can be used, including PCR amplicons, plasmids, and mini-circles. In general, it has been found that an AAV vector can be a very effective means of delivery of a donor template, though the packaging limits for individual donors is <5 kb. Active transcription of the donor increased HDR three-fold, indicating the inclusion of promoter may increase conversion. Conversely, CpG methylation of the donor decreased gene expression and HDR.

Donor nucleotides for correcting mutations often are small (<300 bp). This is advantageous, as HDR efficiencies may be inversely related to the size of the donor molecule. Also, it is expected that the donor templates can fit into size constrained AAV molecules, which have been shown to be an effective means of donor template delivery.

In addition to wildtype endonucleases, such as Cas9, nickase variants exist that have one or the other nuclease domain inactivated resulting in cutting of only one DNA strand. HDR can be directed from individual Cas nickases or using pairs of nickases that flank the target area. Donors can be single-stranded, nicked, or dsDNA.

The donor DNA can be supplied with the nuclease or independently by a variety of different methods, for example by transfection, nanoparticle, microinjection, or viral transduction. A range of tethering options has been proposed to increase the availability of the donors for HDR. Examples include attaching the donor to the nuclease, attaching to DNA binding proteins that bind nearby, or attaching to proteins that are involved in DNA end binding or repair.

The repair pathway choice can be guided by a number of culture conditions, such as those that influence cell cycling, or by targeting of DNA repair and associated proteins. For example, to increase HDR, key NHEJ molecules can be suppressed, such as KU70, KU80 or DNA ligase IV.

Without a donor present, the ends from a DNA break or ends from different breaks can be joined using the several non-homologous repair pathways in which the DNA ends are joined with little or no base-pairing at the junction. In addition to canonical NHEJ, there are similar repair mechanisms, such as ANHEJ. If there are two breaks, the intervening segment can be deleted or inverted. NHEJ repair pathways can lead to insertions, deletions or mutations at the joints.

NHEJ was used to insert a 15-kb inducible gene expression cassette into a defined locus in human cell lines after nuclease cleavage. The methods of insertion of large inducible gene expression cassettes have been described [Maresca, M., Lin, V.G., Guo, N. & Yang, Y., Genome Res 23, 539-546 (2013), Suzuki et al. Nature, 540, 144-149 (2016))].

In addition to genome editing by NHEJ or HDR, site-specific gene insertions have been conducted that use both the NHEJ pathway and HDR. A combination approach can be applicable in certain settings, possibly including intron/exon borders. NHEJ may prove effective for ligation in the intron, while the error-free HDR may be better suited in the coding region.

Illustrative modifications within the USH2A gene include replacements within or near (proximal) to the mutations referred to above, such as within the region of less than 3 kb, less than 2 kb, less than 1 kb, less than 0.5 kb upstream or downstream of the specific mutation. Given the relatively wide variations of mutations in the USH2A gene, it will be appreciated that numerous variations of the replacements referenced above (including without limitation larger as well as smaller deletions), would be expected to result in restoration of the usherin protein function.

Such variants can include replacements that are larger in the 5′ and/or 3′ direction than the specific mutation in question, or smaller in either direction. Accordingly, by “near” or “proximal” with respect to specific replacements, it is intended that the SSB or DSB locus associated with a desired replacement boundary (also referred to herein as an endpoint) can be within a region that is less than about 3 kb from the reference locus e.g. the mutation site. The SSB or DSB locus can be more proximal and within 2 kb, within 1 kb, within 0.5 kb, or within 0.1 kb. In the case of a small replacement, the desired endpoint can be at or “adjacent to” the reference locus, by which it is intended that the endpoint can be within 100 bp, within 50 bp, within 25 bp, or less than about 10 bp to 5 bp from the reference locus.

Larger or smaller replacements provide the same benefit, as long as the usherin protein function is restored. It is thus expected that many variations of the replacements described and illustrated herein can be effective for ameliorating one or more of Usher Syndrome Type 2A and non-syndromic ARRP.

The terms “near” or “proximal” with respect to the SSBs or DSBs refer to the SSBs or DSBs being within 3 kb, within 2 kb, within 1 kb, within 0.5 kb, within 0.25 kb, within 0.2 kb, within 0.1 kb, within 50 bp, within 25 bp, within 20 bp, within 15 bp, within 10 bp, or within 5 bp of the intron 12-13, exon 13, or intron 13-14. For example, the SSB or DSB locus can be within 3 kb, within 2 kb, within 1 kb, within 0.5 kb, within 0.25 kb, within 0.2 kb, within 0.1 kb, within 50 bp, within 25 bp, within 20 bp, within 15 bp, within 10 bp, or within 5 bp of intron 12-13. The SSB or DSB locus can be within 3 kb, within 2 kb, within 1 kb, within 0.5 kb, within 0.25 kb, within 0.2 kb, within 0.1 kb, within 50 bp, within 25 bp, within 20 bp, within 15 bp, within 10 bp, or within 5 bp of exon 13. The SSB or DSB locus can be within 3 kb, within 2 kb, within 1 kb, within 0.5 kb, within 0.25 kb, within 0.2 kb, within 0.1 kb, within 50 bp, within 25 bp, within 20 bp, within 15 bp, within 10 bp, or within 5 bp of intron 13-14.

The terms “near” or “proximal” with respect to the SSBs or DSBs can also refer to the SSBs or DSBs being within 3 kb, within 2 kb, within 1 kb, within 0.5 kb, within 0.25 kb, within 0.2 kb, within 0.1 kb, within 50 bp, within 25 bp, within 20 bp, within 15 bp, within 10 bp, or within 5 bp of the guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 of the USH2A gene.

Nucleic Acid Modifications (Chemical and Structural Modifications)

In some cases, polynucleotides introduced into cells can comprise one or more modifications that can be used individually or in combination, for example, to enhance activity, stability or specificity, alter delivery, reduce innate immune responses in host cells, or for other enhancements, as further described herein and known in the art.

In certain examples, modified polynucleotides can be used in the CRISPR/Cas9/Cpf1 system, in which case the guide RNAs (either single-molecule guides or double-molecule guides) and/or a DNA or an RNA encoding a Cas or Cpf1 endonuclease introduced into a cell can be modified, as described and illustrated below. Such modified polynucleotides can be used in the CRISPR/Cas9/Cpf1 system to edit any one or more genomic loci.

Using the CRISPR/Cas9/Cpf1 system for purposes of non-limiting illustrations of such uses, modifications of guide RNAs can be used to enhance the formation or stability of the CRISPR/Cas9/Cpf1 genome editing complex comprising guide RNAs, which can be single-molecule guides or double-molecule, and a Cas or Cpf1 endonuclease. Modifications of guide RNAs can also or alternatively be used to enhance the initiation, stability or kinetics of interactions between the genome editing complex with the target sequence in the genome, which can be used, for example, to enhance on-target activity. Modifications of guide RNAs can also or alternatively be used to enhance specificity, e.g., the relative rates of genome editing at the on-target site as compared to effects at other (off-target) sites.

Modifications can also or alternatively be used to increase the stability of a guide RNA, e.g., by increasing its resistance to degradation by ribonucleases (RNases) present in a cell, thereby causing its half-life in the cell to be increased. Modifications enhancing guide RNA half-life can be particularly useful in aspects in which a Cas or Cpf1 endonuclease is introduced into the cell to be edited via an RNA that needs to be translated in order to generate endonuclease, because increasing the half-life of guide RNAs introduced at the same time as the RNA encoding the endonuclease can be used to increase the time that the guide RNAs and the encoded Cas or Cpf1 endonuclease co-exist in the cell.

Modifications can also or alternatively be used to decrease the likelihood or degree to which RNAs introduced into cells elicit innate immune responses. Such responses, which have been well characterized in the context of RNA interference (RNAi), including small-interfering RNAs (siRNAs), as described below and in the art, tend to be associated with reduced half-life of the RNA and/or the elicitation of cytokines or other factors associated with immune responses.

One or more types of modifications can also be made to RNAs encoding an endonuclease that are introduced into a cell, including, without limitation, modifications that enhance the stability of the RNA (such as by increasing its degradation by RNAses present in the cell), modifications that enhance translation of the resulting product (i.e. the endonuclease), and/or modifications that decrease the likelihood or degree to which the RNAs introduced into cells elicit innate immune responses.

Combinations of modifications, such as the foregoing and others, can likewise be used. In the case of CRISPR/Cas9/Cpf1, for example, one or more types of modifications can be made to guide RNAs (including those exemplified above), and/or one or more types of modifications can be made to RNAs encoding Cas endonuclease (including those exemplified above).

By way of illustration, guide RNAs used in the CRISPR/Cas9/Cpf1 system, or other smaller RNAs can be readily synthesized by chemical means, enabling a number of modifications to be readily incorporated, as illustrated below and described in the art. While chemical synthetic procedures are continually expanding, purifications of such RNAs by procedures such as high-performance liquid chromatography (HPLC, which avoids the use of gels such as PAGE) tends to become more challenging as polynucleotide lengths increase significantly beyond a hundred or so nucleotides. One approach that can be used for generating chemically modified RNAs of greater length is to produce two or more molecules that are ligated together. Much longer RNAs, such as those encoding a Cas9 endonuclease, are more readily generated enzymatically. While fewer types of modifications are available for use in enzymatically produced RNAs, there are still modifications that can be used to, e.g., enhance stability, reduce the likelihood or degree of innate immune response, and/or enhance other attributes, as described further below and in the art; and new types of modifications are regularly being developed.

By way of illustration of various types of modifications, especially those used frequently with smaller chemically synthesized RNAs, modifications can comprise one or more nucleotides modified at the 2′ position of the sugar, in some aspects a 2′-O-alkyl, 2′-O-alkyl-O-alkyl, or 2′-fluoro-modified nucleotide. In some examples, RNA modifications can comprise 2′-fluoro, 2′-amino or 2′-O-methyl modifications on the ribose of pyrimidines, abasic residues, or an inverted base at the 3′ end of the RNA. Such modifications can be routinely incorporated into oligonucleotides and these oligonucleotides have been shown to have a higher Tm (i.e., higher target binding affinity) than 2′-deoxyoligonucleotides against a given target.

A number of nucleotide and nucleoside modifications have been shown to make the oligonucleotide into which they are incorporated more resistant to nuclease digestion than the native oligonucleotide; these modified oligos survive intact for a longer time than unmodified oligonucleotides. Specific examples of modified oligonucleotides include those comprising modified backbones, for example, phosphorothioates, phosphotriesters, methyl phosphonates, short chain alkyl or cycloalkyl intersugar linkages or short chain heteroatomic or heterocyclic intersugar linkages. Some oligonucleotides are oligonucleotides with phosphorothioate backbones and those with heteroatom backbones, particularly CH₂—NH—O—CH₂, CH, ˜N(CH₃)˜O˜CH₂ (known as a methylene(methylimino) or MMI backbone), CH₂—O—N (CH₃)—CH₂, CH₂—N(CH₃)—N(CH₃)—CH₂ and O—N(CH₃)— CH₂—CH₂ backbones, wherein the native phosphodiester backbone is represented as O—P—O—CH); amide backbones [see De Mesmaeker et al., Ace. Chem. Res., 28:366-374 (1995)]; morpholino backbone structures (see Summerton and Weller, U.S. Pat. No. 5,034,506); peptide nucleic acid (PNA) backbone (wherein the phosphodiester backbone of the oligonucleotide is replaced with a polyamide backbone, the nucleotides being bound directly or indirectly to the aza nitrogen atoms of the polyamide backbone, see Nielsen et al., Science 1991, 254, 1497). Phosphorus-containing linkages include, but are not limited to, phosphorothioates, chiral phosphorothioates, phosphorodithioates, phosphotriesters, aminoalkylphosphotriesters, methyl and other alkyl phosphonates comprising 3′alkylene phosphonates and chiral phosphonates, phosphinates, phosphoramidates comprising 3′-amino phosphoramidate and aminoalkylphosphoramidates, thionophosphoramidates, thionoalkylphosphonates, thionoalkylphosphotriesters, and boranophosphates having normal 3′-5′ linkages, 2′-5′ linked analogs of these, and those having inverted polarity wherein the adjacent pairs of nucleoside units are linked 3′-5′ to 5′-3′ or 2′-5′ to 5′-2′; see U.S. Pat. Nos. 3,687,808; 4,469,863; 4,476,301; 5,023,243; 5,177,196; 5,188,897; 5,264,423; 5,276,019; 5,278,302; 5,286,717; 5,321,131; 5,399,676; 5,405,939; 5,453,496; 5,455,233; 5,466,677; 5,476,925; 5,519,126; 5,536,821; 5,541,306; 5,550,111; 5,563,253; 5,571,799; 5,587,361; and 5,625,050.

Morpholino-based oligomeric compounds are described in Braasch and Corey, Biochemistry, 41(14): 4503-4510 (2002); Genesis, Volume 30, Issue 3, (2001); Heasman, Dev. Biol., 243: 209-214 (2002); Nasevicius et al., Nat. Genet., 26:216-220 (2000); Lacerra et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci., 97: 9591-9596 (2000); and U.S. Pat. No. 5,034,506, issued Jul. 23, 1991.

Cyclohexenyl nucleic acid oligonucleotide mimetics are described in Wang et al., J. Am. Chem. Soc., 122: 8595-8602 (2000).

Modified oligonucleotide backbones that do not include a phosphorus atom therein have backbones that are formed by short chain alkyl or cycloalkyl internucleoside linkages, mixed heteroatom and alkyl or cycloalkyl internucleoside linkages, or one or more short chain heteroatomic or heterocyclic internucleoside linkages. These comprise those having morpholino linkages (formed in part from the sugar portion of a nucleoside); siloxane backbones; sulfide, sulfoxide and sulfone backbones; formacetyl and thioformacetyl backbones; methylene formacetyl and thioformacetyl backbones; alkene containing backbones; sulfamate backbones; methyleneimino and methylenehydrazino backbones; sulfonate and sulfonamide backbones; amide backbones; and others having mixed N, O, S, and CH₂ component parts; see U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,034,506; 5,166,315; 5,185,444; 5,214,134; 5,216,141; 5,235,033; 5,264,562; 5,264,564; 5,405,938; 5,434,257; 5,466,677; 5,470,967; 5,489,677; 5,541,307; 5,561,225; 5,596,086; 5,602,240; 5,610,289; 5,602,240; 5,608,046; 5,610,289; 5,618,704; 5,623,070; 5,663,312; 5,633,360; 5,677,437; and 5,677,439.

One or more substituted sugar moieties can also be included, e.g., one of the following at the 2′ position: OH, SH, SCH₃, F, OCN, OCH₃ OCH₃, OCH₃ O(CH₂)n CH₃, O(CH₂)n NH₂, or O(CH₂)n CH₃, where n is from 1 to about 10; C1 to C10 lower alkyl, alkoxyalkoxy, substituted lower alkyl, alkaryl or aralkyl; Cl; Br; CN; CF₃; OCF₃; O-, S-, or N-alkyl; O-, S-, or N-alkenyl; SOCH₃; SO₂ CH₃; ONO₂; NO₂; N₃; NH₂; heterocycloalkyl; heterocycloalkaryl; aminoalkylamino; polyalkylamino; substituted silyl; an RNA cleaving group; a reporter group; an intercalator; a group for improving the pharmacokinetic properties of an oligonucleotide; or a group for improving the pharmacodynamic properties of an oligonucleotide and other substituents having similar properties. In some aspects, a modification includes 2′-methoxyethoxy (2′-O—CH₂CH₂OCH₃, also known as 2′-O-(2-methoxyethyl)) (Martin et al, HeIv. Chim. Acta, 1995, 78, 486). Other modifications include 2′-methoxy (2′-O—CH₃), 2′-propoxy (2′-OCH₂ CH₂CH₃) and 2′-fluoro (2′-F). Similar modifications can also be made at other positions on the oligonucleotide, particularly the 3′ position of the sugar on the 3′ terminal nucleotide and the 5′ position of 5′ terminal nucleotide. Oligonucleotides can also have sugar mimetics, such as cyclobutyls in place of the pentofuranosyl group.

In some examples, both a sugar and an internucleoside linkage, i.e., the backbone, of the nucleotide units can be replaced with novel groups. The base units can be maintained for hybridization with an appropriate nucleic acid target compound. One such oligomeric compound, an oligonucleotide mimetic that has been shown to have excellent hybridization properties, is referred to as a peptide nucleic acid (PNA). In PNA compounds, the sugar-backbone of an oligonucleotide can be replaced with an amide containing backbone, for example, an aminoethylglycine backbone. The nucleobases can be retained and bound directly or indirectly to aza nitrogen atoms of the amide portion of the backbone. Representative U.S. patents that teach the preparation of PNA compounds comprise, but are not limited to, U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,539,082; 5,714,331; and 5,719,262. Further teaching of PNA compounds can be found in Nielsen et al, Science, 254: 1497-1500 (1991).

Guide RNAs can also include, additionally or alternatively, nucleobase (often referred to in the art simply as “base”) modifications or substitutions. As used herein, “unmodified” or “natural” nucleobases include adenine (A), guanine (G), thymine (T), cytosine (C), and uracil (U). Modified nucleobases include nucleobases found only infrequently or transiently in natural nucleic acids, e.g., hypoxanthine, 6-methyladenine, 5-Me pyrimidines, particularly 5-methylcytosine (also referred to as 5-methyl-2′ deoxycytosine and often referred to in the art as 5-Me-C), 5-hydroxymethylcytosine (HMC), glycosyl HMC and gentobiosyl HMC, as well as synthetic nucleobases, e.g., 2-aminoadenine, 2-(methylamino) adenine, 2-(imidazolylalkyl)adenine, 2-(aminoalklyamino) adenine or other heterosubstituted alkyladenines, 2-thiouracil, 2-thiothymine, 5-bromouracil, 5-hydroxymethyluracil, 8-azaguanine, 7-deazaguanine, N6 (6-aminohexyl) adenine, and 2,6-diaminopurine. Kornberg, A., DNA Replication, W. H. Freeman & Co., San Francisco, pp. 75-77 (1980); Gebeyehu et al., Nucl. Acids Res. 15:4513 (1997). A “universal” base known in the art, e.g., inosine, can also be included. 5-Me-C substitutions have been shown to increase nucleic acid duplex stability by 0.6-1.2° C. (Sanghvi, Y. S., in Crooke, S. T. and Lebleu, B., eds., Antisense Research and Applications, CRC Press, Boca Raton, 1993, pp. 276-278) and are aspects of base substitutions.

Modified nucleobases can comprise other synthetic and natural nucleobases, such as 5-methylcytosine (5-me-C), 5-hydroxymethyl cytosine, xanthine, hypoxanthine, 2-aminoadenine, 6-methyl and other alkyl derivatives of adenine and guanine, 2-propyl and other alkyl derivatives of adenine and guanine, 2-thiouracil, 2-thiothymine and 2-thiocytosine, 5-halouracil and cytosine, 5-propynyl uracil and cytosine, 6-azo uracil, cytosine and thymine, 5-uracil (pseudo-uracil), 4-thiouracil, 8-halo, 8-amino, 8-thiol, 8-thioalkyl, 8-hydroxyl and other 8-substituted adenines and guanines, 5-halo particularly 5-bromo, 5-trifluoromethyl and other 5-substituted uracils and cytosines, 7-methylquanine and 7-methyladenine, 8-azaguanine and 8-azaadenine, 7-deazaguanine and 7-deazaadenine, and 3-deazaguanine and 3-deazaadenine.

Further, nucleobases can comprise those disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 3,687,808, those disclosed in ‘The Concise Encyclopedia of Polymer Science and Engineering’, pages 858-859, Kroschwitz, J. I., ed. John Wiley & Sons, 1990, those disclosed by Englisch et al., Angewandle Chemie, International Edition’, 1991, 30, page 613, and those disclosed by Sanghvi, Y. S., Chapter 15, Antisense Research and Applications’, pages 289-302, Crooke, S. T. and Lebleu, B. ea., CRC Press, 1993. Certain of these nucleobases are particularly useful for increasing the binding affinity of the oligomeric compounds of the invention. These include 5-substituted pyrimidines, 6-azapyrimidines and N-2, N-6 and 0-6 substituted purines, comprising 2-aminopropyladenine, 5-propynyluracil and 5-propynylcytosine. 5-methylcytosine substitutions have been shown to increase nucleic acid duplex stability by 0.6-1.2° C. (Sanghvi, Y. S., Crooke, S. T. and Lebleu, B., eds, ‘Antisense Research and Applications’, CRC Press, Boca Raton, 1993, pp. 276-278) and are aspects of base substitutions, even more particularly when combined with 2′-O-methoxyethyl sugar modifications. Modified nucleobases are described in U.S. Pat. No. 3,687,808, as well as U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,845,205; 5,130,302; 5,134,066; 5,175,273; 5,367,066; 5,432,272; 5,457,187; 5,459,255; 5,484,908; 5,502,177; 5,525,711; 5,552,540; 5,587,469; 5,596,091; 5,614,617; 5,681,941; 5,750,692; 5,763,588; 5,830,653; 6,005,096; and U.S. Patent Application Publication 2003/0158403.

Thus, the term “modified” refers to a non-natural sugar, phosphate, or base that is incorporated into a guide RNA, an endonuclease, or both a guide RNA and an endonuclease. It is not necessary for all positions in a given oligonucleotide to be uniformly modified, and in fact more than one of the aforementioned modifications can be incorporated in a single oligonucleotide, or even in a single nucleoside within an oligonucleotide.

The guide RNAs and/or mRNA (or DNA) encoding an endonuclease can be chemically linked to one or more moieties or conjugates that enhance the activity, cellular distribution, or cellular uptake of the oligonucleotide. Such moieties comprise, but are not limited to, lipid moieties such as a cholesterol moiety [Letsinger et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 86: 6553-6556 (1989)]; cholic acid [Manoharan et al., Bioorg. Med. Chem. Let., 4: 1053-1060 (1994)]; a thioether, e.g., hexyl-S-tritylthiol [Manoharan et al, Ann. N. Y. Acad. Sci., 660: 306-309 (1992) and Manoharan et al., Bioorg. Med. Chem. Let., 3: 2765-2770 (1993)]; a thiocholesterol [Oberhauser et al., Nucl. Acids Res., 20: 533-538 (1992)]; an aliphatic chain, e.g., dodecandiol or undecyl residues [Kabanov et al., FEBS Lett., 259: 327-330 (1990) and Svinarchuk et al., Biochimie, 75: 49-54 (1993)]; a phospholipid, e.g., di-hexadecyl-rac-glycerol or triethylammonium 1,2-di-O-hexadecyl-rac-glycero-3-H-phosphonate [Manoharan et al., Tetrahedron Lett., 36: 3651-3654 (1995) and Shea et al., Nucl. Acids Res., 18: 3777-3783 (1990)]; a polyamine or a polyethylene glycol chain [Mancharan et al., Nucleosides & Nucleotides, 14: 969-973 (1995)]; adamantane acetic acid [Manoharan et al., Tetrahedron Lett., 36: 3651-3654 (1995)]; a palmityl moiety [(Mishra et al., Biochim. Biophys. Acta, 1264: 229-237 (1995)]; or an octadecylamine or hexylamino-carbonyl-t oxycholesterol moiety [Crooke et al., J. Pharmacol. Exp. Ther., 277: 923-937 (1996)]. See also U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,828,979; 4,948,882; 5,218,105; 5,525,465; 5,541,313; 5,545,730; 5,552,538; 5,578,717; 5,580,731; 5,580,731; 5,591,584; 5,109,124; 5,118,802; 5,138,045; 5,414,077; 5,486,603; 5,512,439; 5,578,718; 5,608,046; 4,587,044; 4,605,735; 4,667,025; 4,762,779; 4,789,737; 4,824,941; 4,835,263; 4,876,335; 4,904,582; 4,958,013; 5,082,830; 5,112,963; 5,214,136; 5,082,830; 5,112,963; 5,214,136; 5,245,022; 5,254,469; 5,258,506; 5,262,536; 5,272,250; 5,292,873; 5,317,098; 5,371,241; 5,391,723; 5,416,203; 5,451,463; 5,510,475; 5,512,667; 5,514,785; 5,565,552; 5,567,810; 5,574,142; 5,585,481; 5,587,371; 5,595,726; 5,597,696; 5,599,923; 5,599, 928 and 5,688,941.

Sugars and other moieties can be used to target proteins and complexes comprising nucleotides, such as cationic polysomes and liposomes, to particular sites. For example, hepatic cell directed transfer can be mediated via asialoglycoprotein receptors (ASGPRs); see, e.g., Hu, et al., Protein Pept Lett. 21(10):1025-30 (2014). Other systems known in the art and regularly developed can be used to target biomolecules of use in the present case and/or complexes thereof to particular target cells of interest.

These targeting moieties or conjugates can include conjugate groups covalently bound to functional groups, such as primary or secondary hydroxyl groups. Conjugate groups of the present disclosure include intercalators, reporter molecules, polyamines, polyamides, polyethylene glycols, polyethers, groups that enhance the pharmacodynamic properties of oligomers, and groups that enhance the pharmacokinetic properties of oligomers. Typical conjugate groups include cholesterols, lipids, phospholipids, biotin, phenazine, folate, phenanthridine, anthraquinone, acridine, fluoresceins, rhodamines, coumarins, and dyes. Groups that enhance the pharmacodynamic properties, in the context of this present disclosure, include groups that improve uptake, enhance resistance to degradation, and/or strengthen sequence-specific hybridization with the target nucleic acid. Groups that enhance the pharmacokinetic properties, in the context of this invention, include groups that improve uptake, distribution, metabolism or excretion of the compounds of the present disclosure. Representative conjugate groups are disclosed in International Patent Application No. PCT/US92/09196, filed Oct. 23, 1992 (published as WO1993007883), and U.S. Pat. No. 6,287,860. Conjugate moieties include, but are not limited to, lipid moieties such as a cholesterol moiety, cholic acid, a thioether, e.g., hexyl-5-tritylthiol, a thiocholesterol, an aliphatic chain, e.g., dodecandiol or undecyl residues, a phospholipid, e.g., di-hexadecyl-rac-glycerol or triethylammonium1,2-di-O-hexadecyl-rac-glycero-3-H-phosphonate, a polyamine or a polyethylene glycol chain, or adamantane acetic acid, a palmityl moiety, or an octadecylamine or hexylamino-carbonyl-oxy cholesterol moiety. See, e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,828,979; 4,948,882; 5,218,105; 5,525,465; 5,541,313; 5,545,730; 5,552,538; 5,578,717, 5,580,731; 5,580,731; 5,591,584; 5,109,124; 5,118,802; 5,138,045; 5,414,077; 5,486,603; 5,512,439; 5,578,718; 5,608,046; 4,587,044; 4,605,735; 4,667,025; 4,762,779; 4,789,737; 4,824,941; 4,835,263; 4,876,335; 4,904,582; 4,958,013; 5,082,830; 5,112,963; 5,214,136; 5,082,830; 5,112,963; 5,214,136; 5,245,022; 5,254,469; 5,258,506; 5,262,536; 5,272,250; 5,292,873; 5,317,098; 5,371,241; 5,391,723; 5,416,203, 5,451,463; 5,510,475; 5,512,667; 5,514,785; 5,565,552; 5,567,810; 5,574,142; 5,585,481; 5,587,371; 5,595,726; 5,597,696; 5,599,923; 5,599,928 and 5,688,941.

Longer polynucleotides that are less amenable to chemical synthesis and are typically produced by enzymatic synthesis can also be modified by various means. Such modifications can include, for example, the introduction of certain nucleotide analogs, the incorporation of particular sequences or other moieties at the 5′ or 3′ ends of molecules, and other modifications. By way of illustration, the mRNA encoding Cas9 is approximately 4 kb in length and can be synthesized by in vitro transcription. Modifications to the mRNA can be applied to, e.g., increase its translation or stability (such as by increasing its resistance to degradation with a cell), or to reduce the tendency of the RNA to elicit an innate immune response that is often observed in cells following introduction of exogenous RNAs, particularly longer RNAs such as that encoding Cas9.

Numerous such modifications have been described in the art, such as polyA tails, 5′ cap analogs (e.g., Anti Reverse Cap Analog (ARCA) or m7G(5′)ppp(5′)G (mCAP)), modified 5′ or 3′ untranslated regions (UTRs), use of modified bases (such as Pseudo-UTP, 2-Thio-UTP, 5-Methylcytidine-5′-Triphosphate (5-Methyl-CTP) or N6-Methyl-ATP), or treatment with phosphatase to remove 5′ terminal phosphates. These and other modifications are known in the art, and new modifications of RNAs are regularly being developed.

There are numerous commercial suppliers of modified RNAs, including for example, TriLink Biotech, AxoLabs, Bio-Synthesis Inc., Dharmacon and many others. As described by TriLink, for example, 5-Methyl-CTP can be used to impart desirable characteristics, such as increased nuclease stability, increased translation or reduced interaction of innate immune receptors with in vitro transcribed RNA. 5-Methylcytidine-5′-Triphosphate (5-Methyl-CTP), N6-Methyl-ATP, as well as Pseudo-UTP and 2-Thio-UTP, have also been shown to reduce innate immune stimulation in culture and in vivo while enhancing translation, as illustrated in publications by Kormann et al. and Warren et al. referred to below.

It has been shown that chemically modified mRNA delivered in vivo can be used to achieve improved therapeutic effects; see, e.g., Kormann et al., Nature Biotechnology 29, 154-157 (2011). Such modifications can be used, for example, to increase the stability of the RNA molecule and/or reduce its immunogenicity. Using chemical modifications such as Pseudo-U, N6-Methyl-A, 2-Thio-U and 5-Methyl-C, it was found that substituting just one quarter of the uridine and cytidine residues with 2-Thio-U and 5-Methyl-C respectively resulted in a significant decrease in toll-like receptor (TLR) mediated recognition of the mRNA in mice. By reducing the activation of the innate immune system, these modifications can be used to effectively increase the stability and longevity of the mRNA in vivo; see, e.g., Kormann et al., supra.

It has also been shown that repeated administration of synthetic messenger RNAs incorporating modifications designed to bypass innate anti-viral responses can reprogram differentiated human cells to pluripotency. See, e.g., Warren, et al., Cell Stem Cell, 7(5):618-30 (2010). Such modified mRNAs that act as primary reprogramming proteins can be an efficient means of reprogramming multiple human cell types. Such cells are referred to as induced pluripotency stem cells (iPSCs), and it was found that enzymatically synthesized RNA incorporating 5-Methyl-CTP, Pseudo-UTP and an Anti Reverse Cap Analog (ARCA) could be used to effectively evade the cell's antiviral response; see, e.g., Warren et al., supra.

Other modifications of polynucleotides described in the art include, for example, the use of polyA tails, the addition of 5′ cap analogs such as (m7G(5′)ppp(5′)G (mCAP)), modifications of 5′ or 3′ untranslated regions (UTRs), or treatment with phosphatase to remove 5′ terminal phosphates—and new approaches are regularly being developed.

A number of compositions and techniques applicable to the generation of modified RNAs for use herein have been developed in connection with the modification of RNA interference (RNAi), including small-interfering RNAs (siRNAs). siRNAs present particular challenges in vivo because their effects on gene silencing via mRNA interference are generally transient, which can require repeat administration. In addition, siRNAs are double-stranded RNAs (dsRNA) and mammalian cells have immune responses that have evolved to detect and neutralize dsRNA, which is often a by-product of viral infection. Thus, there are mammalian enzymes such as PKR (dsRNA-responsive kinase), and potentially retinoic acid-inducible gene I (RIG-I), that can mediate cellular responses to dsRNA, as well as Toll-like receptors (such as TLR3, TLR7 and TLR8) that can trigger the induction of cytokines in response to such molecules; see, e.g., the reviews by Angart et al., Pharmaceuticals (Basel) 6(4): 440-468 (2013); Kanasty et al., Molecular Therapy 20(3): 513-524 (2012); Burnett et al., Biotechnol J. 6(9):1130-46 (2011); Judge and MacLachlan, Hum Gene Ther 19(2):111-24 (2008).

A large variety of modifications have been developed and applied to enhance RNA stability, reduce innate immune responses, and/or achieve other benefits that can be useful in connection with the introduction of polynucleotides into human cells, as described herein; see, e.g., the reviews by Whitehead K A et al., Annual Review of Chemical and Biomolecular Engineering, 2: 77-96 (2011); Gaglione and Messere, Mini Rev Med Chem, 10(7):578-95 (2010); Chernolovskaya et al, Curr Opin Mol Ther., 12(2):158-67 (2010); Deleavey et al., Curr Protoc Nucleic Acid Chem Chapter 16:Unit 16.3 (2009); Behlke, Oligonucleotides 18(4):305-19 (2008); Fucini et al., Nucleic Acid Ther 22(3): 205-210 (2012); Bremsen et al., Front Genet 3:154 (2012).

As noted above, there are a number of commercial suppliers of modified RNAs, many of which have specialized in modifications designed to improve the effectiveness of siRNAs. A variety of approaches are offered based on various findings reported in the literature. For example, Dharmacon notes that replacement of a non-bridging oxygen with sulfur (phosphorothioate, PS) has been extensively used to improve nuclease resistance of siRNAs, as reported by Kole, Nature Reviews Drug Discovery 11:125-140 (2012). Modifications of the 2′-position of the ribose have been reported to improve nuclease resistance of the internucleotide phosphate bond while increasing duplex stability (Tm), which has also been shown to provide protection from immune activation. A combination of moderate PS backbone modifications with small, well-tolerated 2′-substitutions (2′-O-Methyl, 2′-Fluoro, 2′-Hydro) have been associated with highly stable siRNAs for applications in vivo, as reported by Soutschek et al. Nature 432:173-178 (2004); and 2′-O-Methyl modifications have been reported to be effective in improving stability as reported by Volkov, Oligonucleotides 19:191-202 (2009). With respect to decreasing the induction of innate immune responses, modifying specific sequences with 2′-O-Methyl, 2′-Fluoro, 2′-Hydro have been reported to reduce TLR7/TLR8 interaction while generally preserving silencing activity; see, e.g., Judge et al., Mol. Ther. 13:494-505 (2006); and Cekaite et al., J. Mol. Biol. 365:90-108 (2007). Additional modifications, such as 2-thiouracil, pseudouracil, 5-methylcytosine, 5-methyluracil, and N6-methyladenosine have also been shown to minimize the immune effects mediated by TLR3, TLR7, and TLR8; see, e.g., Kariko, K. et al., Immunity 23:165-175 (2005).

As is also known in the art, and commercially available, a number of conjugates can be applied to polynucleotides, such as RNAs, for use herein that can enhance their delivery and/or uptake by cells, including for example, cholesterol, tocopherol and folic acid, lipids, peptides, polymers, linkers and aptamers; see, e.g., the review by Winkler, Ther. Deliv. 4:791-809 (2013).

Codon-Optimization

A polynucleotide encoding a site-directed polypeptide can be codon-optimized according to methods standard in the art for expression in the cell containing the target DNA of interest. For example, if the intended target nucleic acid is in a human cell, a human codon-optimized polynucleotide encoding Cas9 is contemplated for use for producing the Cas9 polypeptide.

Nucleic Acids Encoding System Components

The present disclosure provides a nucleic acid comprising a nucleotide sequence encoding a genome-targeting nucleic acid of the disclosure, a site-directed polypeptide of the disclosure, and/or any nucleic acid or proteinaceous molecule necessary to carry out the aspects of the methods of the disclosure.

The nucleic acid encoding a genome-targeting nucleic acid of the disclosure, a site-directed polypeptide of the disclosure, and/or any nucleic acid or proteinaceous molecule necessary to carry out the aspects of the methods of the disclosure can comprise a vector (e.g., a recombinant expression vector).

The term “vector” refers to a nucleic acid molecule capable of transporting another nucleic acid to which it has been linked. One type of vector is a “plasmid”, which refers to a circular double-stranded DNA loop into which additional nucleic acid segments can be ligated. Another type of vector is a viral vector; wherein additional nucleic acid segments can be ligated into the viral genome. Certain vectors are capable of autonomous replication in a host cell into which they are introduced (e.g., bacterial vectors having a bacterial origin of replication and episomal mammalian vectors). Other vectors (e.g., non-episomal mammalian vectors) are integrated into the genome of a host cell upon introduction into the host cell, and thereby are replicated along with the host genome.

In some examples, vectors can be capable of directing the expression of nucleic acids to which they are operatively linked. Such vectors are referred to herein as “recombinant expression vectors”, or more simply “expression vectors”, which serve equivalent functions.

The term “operably linked” means that the nucleotide sequence of interest is linked to regulatory sequence(s) in a manner that allows for expression of the nucleotide sequence. The term “regulatory sequence” is intended to include, for example, promoters, enhancers and other expression control elements (e.g., polyadenylation signals). Such regulatory sequences are described, for example, in Goeddel; Gene Expression Technology: Methods in Enzymology 185, Academic Press, San Diego, Calif. (1990). Regulatory sequences include those that direct constitutive expression of a nucleotide sequence in many types of host cells, and those that direct expression of the nucleotide sequence only in certain host cells (e.g., tissue-specific regulatory sequences). It will be appreciated by those skilled in the art that the design of the expression vector can depend on such factors as the choice of the target cell, the level of expression desired, and the like.

Expression vectors contemplated include, but are not limited to, viral vectors based on vaccinia virus, poliovirus, adenovirus, adeno-associated virus, SV40, herpes simplex virus, human immunodeficiency virus, retrovirus (e.g., Murine Leukemia Virus, spleen necrosis virus, and vectors derived from retroviruses such as Rous Sarcoma Virus, Harvey Sarcoma Virus, avian leukosis virus, a lentivirus, human immunodeficiency virus, myeloproliferative sarcoma virus, and mammary tumor virus) and other recombinant vectors. Other vectors contemplated for eukaryotic target cells include, but are not limited to, the vectors pXT1, pSG5, pSVK3, pBPV, pMSG, and pSVLSV40 (Pharmacia). Additional vectors contemplated for eukaryotic target cells include, but are not limited to, the vectors pCTx-1, pCTx-2, and pCTx-3. Other vectors can be used so long as they are compatible with the host cell.

In some examples, a vector can comprise one or more transcription and/or translation control elements. Depending on the host/vector system utilized, any of a number of suitable transcription and translation control elements, including constitutive and inducible promoters, transcription enhancer elements, transcription terminators, etc. can be used in the expression vector. The vector can be a self-inactivating vector that either inactivates the viral sequences or the components of the CRISPR machinery or other elements.

Non-limiting examples of suitable eukaryotic promoters (i.e., promoters functional in a eukaryotic cell) include those from cytomegalovirus (CMV) immediate early, herpes simplex virus (HSV) thymidine kinase, early and late SV40, long terminal repeats (LTRs) from retrovirus, human elongation factor-1 promoter (EF1), a hybrid construct comprising the cytomegalovirus (CMV) enhancer fused to the chicken beta-actin promoter (CAG), murine stem cell virus promoter (MSCV), phosphoglycerate kinase-1 locus promoter (PGK), and mouse metallothionein-I.

For expressing small RNAs, including guide RNAs used in connection with Cas endonuclease, various promoters such as RNA polymerase III promoters, including for example U6 and H1, can be advantageous. Descriptions of and parameters for enhancing the use of such promoters are known in art, and additional information and approaches are regularly being described; see, e.g., Ma, H. et al., Molecular Therapy-Nucleic Acids 3, e161 (2014) doi:10.1038/mtna.2014.12.

The expression vector can also contain a ribosome binding site for translation initiation and a transcription terminator. The expression vector can also comprise appropriate sequences for amplifying expression. The expression vector can also include nucleotide sequences encoding non-native tags (e.g., histidine tag, hemagglutinin tag, green fluorescent protein, etc.) that are fused to the site-directed polypeptide, thus resulting in a fusion protein.

A promoter can be an inducible promoter (e.g., a heat shock promoter, tetracycline-regulated promoter, steroid-regulated promoter, metal-regulated promoter, estrogen receptor-regulated promoter, etc.). The promoter can be a constitutive promoter (e.g., CMV promoter, UBC promoter). In some cases, the promoter can be a spatially restricted and/or temporally restricted promoter (e.g., a tissue specific promoter, a cell type specific promoter, etc.).

The nucleic acid encoding a genome-targeting nucleic acid of the disclosure and/or a site-directed polypeptide can be packaged into or on the surface of delivery vehicles for delivery to cells. Delivery vehicles contemplated include, but are not limited to, nanospheres, liposomes, quantum dots, nanoparticles, polyethylene glycol particles, hydrogels, and micelles. As described in the art, a variety of targeting moieties can be used to enhance the preferential interaction of such vehicles with desired cell types or locations.

Introduction of the complexes, polypeptides, and nucleic acids of the disclosure into cells can occur by viral or bacteriophage infection, transfection, conjugation, protoplast fusion, lipofection, electroporation, nucleofection, calcium phosphate precipitation, polyethyleneimine (PEI)-mediated transfection, DEAE-dextran mediated transfection, liposome-mediated transfection, particle gun technology, calcium phosphate precipitation, direct micro-injection, nanoparticle-mediated nucleic acid delivery, and the like.

microRNA (miRNA)

Another class of gene regulatory regions is microRNA (miRNA) binding sites. miRNAs are non-coding RNAs that play key roles in post-transcriptional gene regulation. miRNA reportedly regulate the expression of a large number of mammalian protein-encoding genes. Specific and potent gene silencing by double-stranded RNA (RNAi) was discovered, plus additional small noncoding RNA (Canver, M. C. et al., Nature (2015)). The largest class of non-coding RNAs important for gene silencing is miRNAs. In mammals, miRNAs are first transcribed as long RNA transcripts, which can be separate transcriptional units, part of protein introns, or other transcripts. The long transcripts are called primary miRNA (pri-miRNA) that include imperfectly base-paired hairpin structures. These pri-miRNA can be cleaved into one or more shorter precursor miRNAs (pre-miRNAs) by Microprocessor, a protein complex in the nucleus, involving Drosha.

Pre-miRNAs are short stem loops ˜70 nucleotides in length with a 2-nucleotide 3′-overhang that are exported into the mature 19-25 nucleotide miRNA:miRNA* duplexes. The miRNA strand with lower base pairing stability (the guide strand) can be loaded onto the RNA-induced silencing complex (RISC). The passenger guide strand (marked with *), can be functional, but is usually degraded. The mature miRNA tethers RISC to partly complementary sequence motifs in target mRNAs predominantly found within the 3′ untranslated regions (UTRs) and induces posttranscriptional gene silencing (Bartel, D. P. Cell 136, 215-233 (2009); Saj, A. & Lai, E. C. Curr Opin Genet Dev 21, 504-510 (2011)).

miRNAs can be important in development, differentiation, cell cycle and growth control, and in virtually all biological pathways in mammals and other multicellular organisms. miRNAs can also be involved in cell cycle control, apoptosis and stem cell differentiation, hematopoiesis, hypoxia, muscle development, neurogenesis, insulin secretion, cholesterol metabolism, aging, viral replication and immune responses.

A single miRNA can target hundreds of different mRNA transcripts, while an individual transcript can be targeted by many different miRNAs. More than 28645 miRNAs have been annotated in the latest release of miRBase (v.21). Some miRNAs can be encoded by multiple loci, some of which can be expressed from tandemly co-transcribed clusters. The features allow for complex regulatory networks with multiple pathways and feedback controls. miRNAs can be integral parts of these feedback and regulatory circuits and can help regulate gene expression by keeping protein production within limits (Herranz, H. & Cohen, S. M. Genes Dev 24, 1339-1344 (2010); Posadas, D. M. & Carthew, R. W. Curr Opin Genet Dev 27, 1-6 (2014)).

miRNA can also be important in a large number of human diseases that are associated with abnormal miRNA expression. This association underscores the importance of the miRNA regulatory pathway. Recent miRNA deletion studies have linked miRNA with regulation of the immune responses (Stern-Ginossar, N. et al., Science 317, 376-381 (2007)).

miRNA also have a strong link to cancer and can play a role in different types of cancer. miRNAs have been found to be downregulated in a number of tumors. miRNA can be important in the regulation of key cancer-related pathways, such as cell cycle control and the DNA damage response, and can therefore be used in diagnosis and can be targeted clinically. miRNAs can delicately regulate the balance of angiogenesis, such that experiments depleting all miRNAs suppresses tumor angiogenesis (Chen, S. et al., Genes Dev 28, 1054-1067 (2014)).

As has been shown for protein coding genes, miRNA genes can also be subject to epigenetic changes occurring with cancer. Many miRNA loci can be associated with CpG islands increasing their opportunity for regulation by DNA methylation (Weber, B., Stresemann, C., Brueckner, B. & Lyko, F. Cell Cycle 6, 1001-1005 (2007)). The majority of studies have used treatment with chromatin remodeling drugs to reveal epigenetically silenced miRNAs.

In addition to their role in RNA silencing, miRNAs can also activate translation (Posadas, D. M. & Carthew, R. W. Curr Opin Genet Dev 27, 1-6 (2014)). Knocking out these sites can lead to decreased expression of the targeted gene, while introducing these sites can increase expression.

Individual miRNAs can be knocked out most effectively by mutating the seed sequence (bases 2-8 of the miRNA), which can be important for binding specificity. Cleavage in this region, followed by mis-repair by NHEJ can effectively abolish miRNA function by blocking binding to target sites. miRNAs could also be inhibited by specific targeting of the special loop region adjacent to the palindromic sequence. Catalytically inactive Cas9 can also be used to inhibit shRNA expression (Zhao, Y. et al., Sci Rep 4, 3943 (2014)). In addition to targeting the miRNA, the binding sites can also be targeted and mutated to prevent the silencing by miRNA.

According to the present disclosure, any of the miRNAs or their binding sites can be incorporated into the compositions of the invention.

The compositions can have a region such as, but not limited to, a region comprising the sequence of any of the miRNAs listed in SEQ ID NOs: 613-4696, the reverse complement of the miRNAs listed in SEQ ID NOs: 613-4696, or the miRNA anti-seed region of any of the miRNAs listed in SEQ ID NOs: 613-4696.

The compositions of the invention can comprise one or more miRNA target sequences, miRNA sequences, or miRNA seeds. Such sequences can correspond to any known miRNA such as those taught in US Publication No. 2005/0261218 and US Publication No. 2005/0059005. As a non-limiting example, known miRNAs, their sequences, and their binding site sequences in the human genome are listed in SEQ ID NOs: 613-4696.

A miRNA sequence comprises a “seed” region, i.e., a sequence in the region of positions 2-8 of the mature miRNA, which sequence has perfect Watson-Crick complementarity to the miRNA target sequence. A miRNA seed can comprise positions 2-8 or 2-7 of the mature miRNA. In some examples, a miRNA seed can comprise 7 nucleotides (e.g., nucleotides 2-8 of the mature miRNA), wherein the seed-complementary site in the corresponding miRNA target is flanked by an adenine (A) opposed to miRNA position 1. In some examples, a miRNA seed can comprise 6 nucleotides (e.g., nucleotides 2-7 of the mature miRNA), wherein the seed-complementary site in the corresponding miRNA target is flanked by an adenine (A) opposed to miRNA position 1. See for example, Grimson A, Farh K K, Johnston W K, Garrett-Engele P, Lim L P, Bartel D P; Mol Cell. 2007 Jul. 6; 27(1):91-105. The bases of the miRNA seed have complete complementarity with the target sequence.

Identification of miRNA, miRNA target regions, and their expression patterns and role in biology have been reported (Bonauer et al., Curr Drug Targets 2010 11:943-949; Anand and Cheresh Curr Opin Hematol 2011 18:171-176; Contreras and Rao Leukemia 2012 26:404-413 (2011 Dec. 20. doi: 10.1038/1eu.2011.356); Bartel Cell 2009 136:215-233; Landgraf et al, Cell, 2007 129:1401-1414; Gentner and Naldini, Tissue Antigens. 2012 80:393-403.

For example, if the composition is not intended to be delivered to the liver but ends up there, then miR-122, a miRNA abundant in liver, can inhibit the expression of the sequence delivered if one or multiple target sites of miR-122 are engineered into the polynucleotide encoding that target sequence. Introduction of one or multiple binding sites for different miRNA can be engineered to further decrease the longevity, stability, and protein translation hence providing an additional layer of tenability.

As used herein, the term “microRNA site” refers to a miRNA target site or a miRNA recognition site, or any nucleotide sequence to which an miRNA binds or associates. It should be understood that “binding” can follow traditional Watson-Crick hybridization rules or can reflect any stable association of the miRNA with the target sequence at or adjacent to the miRNA site.

Conversely, for the purposes of the compositions of the present disclosure, miRNA binding sites can be engineered out of (i.e., removed from) sequences in which they naturally occur in order to increase protein expression in specific tissues. For example, miR-122 binding sites can be removed to improve protein expression in the liver.

Specifically, miRNAs are known to be differentially expressed in immune cells (also called hematopoietic cells), such as antigen presenting cells (APCs) (e.g. dendritic cells and macrophages), macrophages, monocytes, B lymphocytes, T lymphocytes, granulocytes, natural killer cells, etc. Immune cell specific miRNAs are involved in immunogenicity, autoimmunity, the immune-response to infection, inflammation, as well as unwanted immune response after gene therapy and tissue/organ transplantation. Immune cells specific miRNAs also regulate many aspects of development, proliferation, differentiation and apoptosis of hematopoietic cells (immune cells). For example, miR-142 and miR-146 are exclusively expressed in the immune cells, particularly abundant in myeloid dendritic cells. Introducing the miR-142 binding site into the 3′-UTR of a polypeptide of the present disclosure can selectively suppress the gene expression in the antigen presenting cells through miR-142 mediated mRNA degradation, limiting antigen presentation in professional APCs (e.g. dendritic cells) and thereby preventing antigen-mediated immune response after gene delivery (see, Annoni A et al., blood, 2009, 114, 5152-5161.

In one example, miRNAs binding sites that are known to be expressed in immune cells, in particular, the antigen presenting cells, can be engineered into the polynucleotides to suppress the expression of the polynucleotide in APCs through miRNA mediated RNA degradation, subduing the antigen-mediated immune response, while the expression of the polynucleotide is maintained in non-immune cells where the immune cell specific miRNAs are not expressed.

Many miRNA expression studies have been conducted, and are described in the art, to profile the differential expression of miRNAs in various cancer cells/tissues and other diseases. Some miRNAs are abnormally over-expressed in certain cancer cells and others are under-expressed. For example, miRNAs are differentially expressed in cancer cells (WO2008/154098, US2013/0059015, US2013/0042333, WO2011/157294); cancer stem cells (US2012/0053224); pancreatic cancers and diseases (US2009/0131348, US2011/0171646, US2010/0286232, U.S. Pat. No. 8,389,210); asthma and inflammation (U.S. Pat. No. 8,415,096); prostate cancer (US2013/0053264); hepatocellular carcinoma (WO2012/151212, US2012/0329672, WO2008/054828, U.S. Pat. No. 8,252,538); lung cancer cells (WO2011/076143, WO2013/033640, WO2009/070653, US2010/0323357); cutaneous T-cell lymphoma (WO2013/011378); colorectal cancer cells (WO2011/0281756, WO2011/076142); cancer positive lymph nodes (WO2009/100430, US2009/0263803); nasopharyngeal carcinoma (EP2112235); chronic obstructive pulmonary disease (US2012/0264626, US2013/0053263); thyroid cancer (WO2013/066678); ovarian cancer cells (US2012/0309645, WO2011/095623); breast cancer cells (WO2008/154098, WO2007/081740, US2012/0214699), leukemia and lymphoma (WO2008/073915, US2009/0092974, US2012/0316081, US2012/0283310, WO2010/018563.

Human Cells

For ameliorating one or more of Usher Syndrome Type 2A and ARRP or any disorder associated with USH2A, as described and illustrated herein, the principal targets for gene editing are human cells. For example, in the ex vivo methods, the human cells can be somatic cells, which after being modified using the techniques as described, can give rise to differentiated cells, e.g., photoreceptor cells or retinal progenitor cells. For example, in the in vivo methods, the human cells can be photoreceptor cells or retinal progenitor cells.

By performing gene editing in autologous cells that are derived from and therefore already completely matched with the patient in need, it is possible to generate cells that can be safely re-introduced into the patient, and effectively give rise to a population of cells that can be effective in ameliorating one or more clinical conditions associated with the patient's disease.

Progenitor cells (also referred to as stem cells herein) are capable of both proliferation and giving rise to more progenitor cells, these in turn having the ability to generate a large number of mother cells that can in turn give rise to differentiated or differentiable daughter cells. The daughter cells themselves can be induced to proliferate and produce progeny that subsequently differentiate into one or more mature cell types, while also retaining one or more cells with parental developmental potential. The term “stem cell” refers then, to a cell with the capacity or potential, under particular circumstances, to differentiate to a more specialized or differentiated phenotype, and which retains the capacity, under certain circumstances, to proliferate without substantially differentiating. In one aspect, the term progenitor or stem cell refers to a generalized mother cell whose descendants (progeny) specialize, often in different directions, by differentiation, e.g., by acquiring completely individual characters, as occurs in progressive diversification of embryonic cells and tissues. Cellular differentiation is a complex process typically occurring through many cell divisions. A differentiated cell can derive from a multipotent cell that, itself, is derived from a multipotent cell, and so on. While each of these multipotent cells can be considered stem cells, the range of cell types that each can give rise to can vary considerably. Some differentiated cells also have the capacity to give rise to cells of greater developmental potential. Such capacity can be natural or can be induced artificially upon treatment with various factors. In many biological instances, stem cells can also be “multipotent” because they can produce progeny of more than one distinct cell type, but this is not required for “stem-ness.”

Self-renewal can be another important aspect of the stem cell. In theory, self-renewal can occur by either of two major mechanisms. Stem cells can divide asymmetrically, with one daughter retaining the stem state and the other daughter expressing some distinct other specific function and phenotype. Alternatively, some of the stem cells in a population can divide symmetrically into two stems, thus maintaining some stem cells in the population as a whole, while other cells in the population give rise to differentiated progeny only. Generally, “progenitor cells” have a cellular phenotype that is more primitive (i.e., is at an earlier step along a developmental pathway or progression than is a fully differentiated cell). Often, progenitor cells also have significant or very high proliferative potential. Progenitor cells can give rise to multiple distinct differentiated cell types or to a single differentiated cell type, depending on the developmental pathway and on the environment in which the cells develop and differentiate.

In the context of cell ontogeny, the adjective “differentiated,” or “differentiating” is a relative term. A “differentiated cell” is a cell that has progressed further down the developmental pathway than the cell to which it is being compared. Thus, stem cells can differentiate into lineage-restricted precursor cells (such as a myocyte progenitor cell), which in turn can differentiate into other types of precursor cells further down the pathway (such as a myocyte precursor), and then to an end-stage differentiated cell, such as a myocyte, which plays a characteristic role in a certain tissue type, and can or cannot retain the capacity to proliferate further.

Edited Human Cells

Provided herein are methods for editing an USH2A gene containing a c.2299delG. Provided herein are gRNAs for editing an USH2A gene containing a c.2299delG in a human cell.

These methods and/or gRNAs disclosed herein can be used to edit a population of human cells. A number of human cells within a cell population sufficient for use in treating a patient can be edited. For example, 95%, 90%, 85%, 80%, 75%, 70%, 65%, 60%, 55%, or 50% of the human cells within a cell population can be edited and can be sufficient to use to treat a patient. In other examples, 45%, 40%, 35%, 30%, 25%, 20%, 15%, 10%, 5%, 1%, or 0.5% of the human cells within a cell population can be edited and can be sufficient to use to treat a patient. In various examples, the edited human cells can be first selected and cultured to expand the number of edited cells before administering them to a patient.

Induced Pluripotent Stem Cells

The genetically engineered human cells described herein can be induced pluripotent stem cells (iPSCs). An advantage of using iPSCs is that the cells can be derived from the same subject to which the progenitor cells are to be administered. That is, a somatic cell can be obtained from a subject, reprogrammed to an induced pluripotent stem cell, and then re-differentiated into a progenitor cell to be administered to the subject (e.g., autologous cells).

Because the progenitors are essentially derived from an autologous source, the risk of engraftment rejection or allergic response can be reduced compared to the use of cells from another subject or group of subjects. In addition, the use of iPSCs negates the need for cells obtained from an embryonic source. Thus, in one aspect, the stem cells used in the disclosed methods are not embryonic stem cells.

Although differentiation is generally irreversible under physiological contexts, several methods have been recently developed to reprogram somatic cells to iPSCs. Exemplary methods are known to those of skill in the art and are described briefly herein below.

The term “reprogramming” refers to a process that alters or reverses the differentiation state of a differentiated cell (e.g., a somatic cell). Stated another way, reprogramming refers to a process of driving the differentiation of a cell backwards to a more undifferentiated or more primitive type of cell. It should be noted that placing many primary cells in culture can lead to some loss of fully differentiated characteristics. Thus, simply culturing such cells included in the term differentiated cells does not render these cells non-differentiated cells (e.g., undifferentiated cells) or pluripotent cells. The transition of a differentiated cell to pluripotency requires a reprogramming stimulus beyond the stimuli that lead to partial loss of differentiated character in culture. Reprogrammed cells also have the characteristic of the capacity of extended passaging without loss of growth potential, relative to primary cell parents, which generally have capacity for only a limited number of divisions in culture.

The cell to be reprogrammed can be either partially or terminally differentiated prior to reprogramming. Reprogramming can encompass complete reversion of the differentiation state of a differentiated cell (e.g., a somatic cell) to a pluripotent state or a multipotent state. Reprogramming can encompass complete or partial reversion of the differentiation state of a differentiated cell (e.g., a somatic cell) to an undifferentiated cell (e.g., an embryonic-like cell). Reprogramming can result in expression of particular genes by the cells, the expression of which further contributes to reprogramming. In certain examples described herein, reprogramming of a differentiated cell (e.g., a somatic cell) can cause the differentiated cell to assume an undifferentiated state (e.g., is an undifferentiated cell). The resulting cells are referred to as “reprogrammed cells,” or “induced pluripotent stem cells (iPSCs or iPS cells).”

Reprogramming can involve alteration, e.g., reversal, of at least some of the heritable patterns of nucleic acid modification (e.g., methylation), chromatin condensation, epigenetic changes, genomic imprinting, etc., that occur during cellular differentiation. Reprogramming is distinct from simply maintaining the existing undifferentiated state of a cell that is already pluripotent or maintaining the existing less than fully differentiated state of a cell that is already a multipotent cell (e.g., a myogenic stem cell). Reprogramming is also distinct from promoting the self-renewal or proliferation of cells that are already pluripotent or multipotent, although the compositions and methods described herein can also be of use for such purposes, in some examples.

Many methods are known in the art that can be used to generate pluripotent stem cells from somatic cells. Any such method that reprograms a somatic cell to the pluripotent phenotype would be appropriate for use in the methods described herein.

Reprogramming methodologies for generating pluripotent cells using defined combinations of transcription factors have been described. Mouse somatic cells can be converted to ES cell-like cells with expanded developmental potential by the direct transduction of Oct4, Sox2, Klf4, and c-Myc; see, e.g., Takahashi and Yamanaka, Cell 126(4): 663-76 (2006). iPSCs resemble ES cells, as they restore the pluripotency-associated transcriptional circuitry and much of the epigenetic landscape. In addition, mouse iPSCs satisfy all the standard assays for pluripotency: specifically, in vitro differentiation into cell types of the three germ layers, teratoma formation, contribution to chimeras, germline transmission [see, e.g., Maherali and Hochedlinger, Cell Stem Cell. 3(6):595-605 (2008)], and tetraploid complementation.

Human iPSCs can be obtained using similar transduction methods, and the transcription factor trio, OCT4, SOX2, and NANOG, has been established as the core set of transcription factors that govern pluripotency; see, e.g., Budniatzky and Gepstein, Stem Cells Transl Med. 3(4):448-57 (2014); Barrett et al., Stem Cells Trans Med 3:1-6 sctm.2014-0121 (2014); Focosi et al., Blood Cancer Journal 4: e211 (2014). The production of iPSCs can be achieved by the introduction of nucleic acid sequences encoding stem cell-associated genes into an adult, somatic cell, historically using viral vectors.

iPSCs can be generated or derived from terminally differentiated somatic cells, as well as from adult stem cells, or somatic stem cells. That is, a non-pluripotent progenitor cell can be rendered pluripotent or multipotent by reprogramming. In such instances, it cannot be necessary to include as many reprogramming factors as required to reprogram a terminally differentiated cell. Further, reprogramming can be induced by the non-viral introduction of reprogramming factors, e.g., by introducing the proteins themselves, or by introducing nucleic acids that encode the reprogramming factors, or by introducing messenger RNAs that upon translation produce the reprogramming factors (see e.g., Warren et al., Cell Stem Cell, 7(5):618-30 (2010). Reprogramming can be achieved by introducing a combination of nucleic acids encoding stem cell-associated genes, including, for example, Oct-4 (also known as Oct-3/4 or Pouf51), Sox1, Sox2, Sox3, Sox 15, Sox 18, NANOG, Klf1, Klf2, Klf4, Klf5, NR5A2, c-Myc, 1-Myc, n-Myc, Rem2, Tert, and LIN28. Reprogramming using the methods and compositions described herein can further comprise introducing one or more of Oct-3/4, a member of the Sox family, a member of the Klf family, and a member of the Myc family to a somatic cell. The methods and compositions described herein can further comprise introducing one or more of each of Oct-4, Sox2, Nanog, c-MYC and Klf4 for reprogramming. As noted above, the exact method used for reprogramming is not necessarily critical to the methods and compositions described herein. However, where cells differentiated from the reprogrammed cells are to be used in, e.g., human therapy, in one aspect the reprogramming is not effected by a method that alters the genome. Thus, in such examples, reprogramming can be achieved, e.g., without the use of viral or plasmid vectors.

The efficiency of reprogramming (i.e., the number of reprogrammed cells) derived from a population of starting cells can be enhanced by the addition of various agents, e.g., small molecules, as shown by Shi et al., Cell-Stem Cell 2:525-528 (2008); Huangfu et al., Nature Biotechnology 26(7):795-797 (2008) and Marson et al., Cell-Stem Cell 3: 132-135 (2008). Thus, an agent or combination of agents that enhance the efficiency or rate of induced pluripotent stem cell production can be used in the production of patient-specific or disease-specific iPSCs. Some non-limiting examples of agents that enhance reprogramming efficiency include soluble Wnt, Wnt conditioned media, BIX-01294 (a G9a histone methyltransferase), PD0325901 (a MEK inhibitor), DNA methyltransferase inhibitors, histone deacetylase (HDAC) inhibitors, valproic acid, 5′-azacytidine, dexamethasone, suberoylanilide, hydroxamic acid (SAHA), vitamin C, and trichostatin (TSA), among others.

Other non-limiting examples of reprogramming enhancing agents include: Suberoylanilide Hydroxamic Acid (SAHA (e.g., MK0683, vorinostat) and other hydroxamic acids), BML-210, Depudecin (e.g., (−)-Depudecin), HC Toxin, Nullscript (4-(1,3-Dioxo-1H,3H-benzo[de]isoquinolin-2-yl)-N-hydroxybutanamide), Phenylbutyrate (e.g., sodium phenylbutyrate) and Valproic Acid ((VP A) and other short chain fatty acids), Scriptaid, Suramin Sodium, Trichostatin A (TSA), APHA Compound 8, Apicidin, Sodium Butyrate, pivaloyloxymethyl butyrate (Pivanex, AN-9), Trapoxin B, Chlamydocin, Depsipeptide (also known as FR901228 or FK228), benzamides (e.g., CI-994 (e.g., N-acetyl dinaline) and MS-27-275), MGCD0103, NVP-LAQ-824, CBHA (m-carboxycinnaminic acid bishydroxamic acid), JNJ16241199, Tubacin, A-161906, proxamide, oxamflatin, 3-C1-UCHA (e.g., 6-(3-chlorophenylureido)caproic hydroxamic acid), AOE (2-amino-8-oxo-9, 10-epoxydecanoic acid), CHAP31 and CHAP 50. Other reprogramming enhancing agents include, for example, dominant negative forms of the HDACs (e.g., catalytically inactive forms), siRNA inhibitors of the HDACs, and antibodies that specifically bind to the HDACs. Such inhibitors are available, e.g., from BIOMOL International, Fukasawa, Merck Biosciences, Novartis, Gloucester Pharmaceuticals, Titan Pharmaceuticals, MethylGene, and Sigma Aldrich.

To confirm the induction of pluripotent stem cells for use with the methods described herein, isolated clones can be tested for the expression of a stem cell marker. Such expression in a cell derived from a somatic cell identifies the cells as induced pluripotent stem cells. Stem cell markers can be selected from the non-limiting group including SSEA3, SSEA4, CD9, Nanog, Fbx15, Ecat1, Esg1, Eras, Gdf3, Fgf4, Cripto, Dax1, Zpf296, S1c2a3, Rex1, Utf1, and Nat1. In one case, for example, a cell that expresses Oct4 or Nanog is identified as pluripotent. Methods for detecting the expression of such markers can include, for example, RT-PCR and immunological methods that detect the presence of the encoded polypeptides, such as Western blots or flow cytometric analyses. Detection can involve not only RT-PCR, but can also include detection of protein markers. Intracellular markers can be best identified via RT-PCR, or protein detection methods such as immunocytochemistry, while cell surface markers are readily identified, e.g., by immunocytochemistry.

The pluripotent stem cell character of isolated cells can be confirmed by tests evaluating the ability of the iPSCs to differentiate into cells of each of the three germ layers. As one example, teratoma formation in nude mice can be used to evaluate the pluripotent character of the isolated clones. The cells can be introduced into nude mice and histology and/or immunohistochemistry can be performed on a tumor arising from the cells. The growth of a tumor comprising cells from all three germ layers, for example, further indicates that the cells are pluripotent stem cells.

Retinal Progenitor Cells and Photoreceptor Cells

In some examples, the genetically engineered human cells described herein are photoreceptor cells or retinal progenitor cells (RPCs). RPCs are multipotent progenitor cells that can give rise to all the six neurons of the retina as well as the Müller glia. Müller glia are a type of retinal glial cells and are the major glial component of the retina. Their function is to support the neurons of the retina and to maintain retinal homeostasis and integrity. Müller glia isolated from adult human retinas have been shown to differentiate into rod photoreceptors. Functional characterization of such Müller glia-derived photoreceptors by patch-clamp recordings has revealed that their electrical properties are comparable to those of adult rods (Giannelli et al., 2011, Stem Cells, (2):344-56). RPCs are gradually specified into lineage-restricted precursor cells during retinogenesis, which then maturate into the terminally differentiated neurons or Müller glia. Fetal-derived human retinal progenitor cells (hRPCs) exhibit molecular characteristics indicative of a retinal progenitor state up to the sixth passage. They demonstrate a gradual decrease in the percentages of KI67-, SOX2-, and vimentin-positive cells from passages 1 to 6, whereas a sustained expression of nestin and PAX6 is seen through passage 6. Microarray analysis of passage 1 hRPCs demonstrates the expression of early retinal developmental genes: VIM (vimentin), KI67, NES (nestin), PAX6, SOX2, HESS, GNL3, OTX2, DACH1, SIX6, and CHX10 (VSX2). The hRPCs are functional in nature and respond to excitatory neurotransmitters (Schmitt et al., 2009, Investigative Ophthalmology and Visual Sciences. 2009; 50(12):5901-8). The outermost region of the retina contains a supportive retinal pigment epithelium (RPE) layer, which maintains photoreceptor health by transporting nutrients and recycling shed photoreceptor parts. The RPE is attached to Bruch's membrane, an extracellular matrix structure at the interface between the choroid and retina. On the other side of the RPE, moving inwards towards the interior of the eye, there are three layers of neurons: light sensing rod and cone photoreceptors, a middle layer of connecting neurons (amacrine, bipolar and horizontal cells) and the innermost layer of ganglion cells, which transmit signals originating in the photoreceptor layer through the optic nerve and into the brain. In some aspects, the genetically engineered human cells described herein are photoreceptor cells, which are specialized types of neurons found in the retina. Photoreceptors convert light into signals that are able to stimulate biological processes and are responsible for sight. Rods and cones are the two classic photoreceptor cells that contribute information to the visual system.

Isolating a Retinal Progenitor Cell and Photoreceptor Cell

Retinal cells, including progenitor cells may be isolated according to any method known in the art. For example, human retinal cells are isolated from fresh surgical specimens. The retinal pigment epithelium (RPE) is separated from the choroid by digesting the tissue with type IV collagenase and the retinal pigment epithelium patches are cultured. Following the growth of 100-500 cells from the explant, the primary cultures are passaged (Ishida M. et al., Current Eye Research 1998; 17(4):392-402) and characterized for expression of RPE markers. Rods are isolated by disruption of the biopsied retina using papain. Precautions are taken to avoid a harsh disruption and improve cell yield. The isolated cells are sorted to yield a population of pure rod cells and characterized further by immunostaining (Feodorova et al., MethodsX 2015; 2:39-46).

In order to isolate cones, neural retina is identified, cut-out, and placed on 10% gelatin. The inner retinal layers are isolated using a laser. The isolated cone monolayers are cultured for 18 hours and compared with untreated retinas by light microscopy and transmission microscopy to check for any structural damage. The cells are characterized for expression of cone-specific markers (Salchow et al., Current Eye Research 2001; 22).

In order to isolate retinal progenitor cells, the biopsied retina is minced with dual scalpels and digested enzymatically in an incubator at 37° C. The supernatants of the digested cells are centrifuged and the cells are resuspended in cell-free retinal progenitor-conditioned medium. The cells are transferred to fibronectin-coated tissue culture flasks containing fresh media and cultured (Klassen et al., Journal of Neuroscience Research 2004; 77:334-343).

Creating Patient Specific iPSCs

One step of the ex vivo methods of the present disclosure can involve creating a patient-specific iPS cell, patient-specific iPS cells, or a patient-specific iPS cell line. There are many established methods in the art for creating patient specific iPS cells, as described in Takahashi and Yamanaka 2006; Takahashi, Tanabe et al. 2007. For example, the creating step can comprise: a) isolating a somatic cell, such as a skin cell or fibroblast, from the patient; and b) introducing a set of pluripotency-associated genes into the somatic cell in order to induce the cell to become a pluripotent stem cell. The set of pluripotency-associated genes can be one or more of the genes selected from the group consisting of OCT4, SOX1, SOX2, SOX3, SOX15, SOX18, NANOG, KLF1, KLF2, KLF4, KLF5, c-MYC, n-MYC, REM2, TERT and LIN28.

Performing a Biopsy or Aspirate of the Patient's Bone Marrow

A biopsy or aspirate is a sample of tissue or fluid taken from the body. There are many different kinds of biopsies or aspirates. Nearly all of them involve using a sharp tool to remove a small amount of tissue. If the biopsy will be on the skin or other sensitive area, numbing medicine can be applied first. A biopsy or aspirate can be performed according to any of the known methods in the art. For example, in a bone marrow aspirate, a large needle is used to enter the pelvis bone to collect bone marrow.

Isolating a Mesenchymal Stem Cell

Mesenchymal stem cells can be isolated according to any method known in the art, such as from a patient's bone marrow or peripheral blood. For example, marrow aspirate can be collected into a syringe with heparin. Cells can be washed and centrifuged on a Percoll™ density gradient. Cells, such as blood cells, liver cells, interstitial cells, macrophages, mast cells, and thymocytes, can be separated using density gradient centrifugation media, Percoll™. The cells can then be cultured in Dulbecco's modified Eagle's medium (DMEM) (low glucose) containing 10% fetal bovine serum (FBS) (Pittinger M F, Mackay A M, Beck S C et al., Science 1999; 284:143-147).

Differentiation of Genome-Edited iPSCs into Other Cell Types

Another step of the ex vivo methods of the present disclosure can comprise differentiating the genome-edited iPSCs into photoreceptor cells or retinal progenitor cells. The differentiating step may be performed according to any method known in the art. For example, iPSCs can be used to generate retinal organioids and photoreceptors as described in the art (Phillips et al., Stem Cells, June 2014, 32(6): pgs. 1480-1492; Zhong et al. Nat. Commun., 2014, 5: pg 4047; Tucker et al., PLoS One, April 2011, 6(4): e18992). For example, hiPSC are differentiated into retinal progenitor cells using various treatments, including Wnt, Nodal, and Notch pathway inhibitors (Noggin, Dk1, LeftyA, and DAPT) and other growth factors. The retinal progenitor cells are further differentiated into photoreceptor cells, the treatment including: exposure to native retinal cells in coculture systems, RX+ or Mitf+ by subsequent treatment with retinoic acid and taurine, or exposure to several exogenous factors including Noggin, Dkk1, DAPT, and insulin-like growth factor (Yang et al., Stem Cells International 2016).

Differentiation of Genome-Edited Mesenchymal Stem Cells into Photoreceptor Cells or Retinal Progenitor Cells

Another step of the ex vivo methods of the present disclosure can comprise differentiating the genome-edited mesenchymal stem cells into photoreceptor cells or retinal progenitor cells. The differentiating step can be performed according to any method known in the art.

Implanting Cells into Patients

Another step of the ex vivo methods of the present disclosure can comprise implanting the photoreceptor cells or retinal progenitor cells into patients. This implanting step can be accomplished using any method of implantation known in the art. For example, the genetically modified cells can be injected directly in the patient's blood or otherwise administered to the patient.

Another step of the ex vivo methods of the invention involves implanting the photoreceptor cells or retinal progenitor cells into patients. This implanting step can be accomplished using any method of implantation known in the art. For example, the genetically modified cells can be injected directly in the patient's eye or otherwise administered to the patient.

Genetically Modified Cells

The term “genetically modified cell” refers to a cell that comprises at least one genetic modification introduced by genome editing (e.g., using the CRISPR/Cas9/Cpf1 system). In some ex vivo examples herein, the genetically modified cell can be genetically modified progenitor cell. In some in vivo examples herein, the genetically modified cell can be a genetically modified photoreceptor cell or retinal progenitor cell. A genetically modified cell comprising an exogenous genome-targeting nucleic acid and/or an exogenous nucleic acid encoding a genome-targeting nucleic acid is contemplated herein.

The term “control treated population” describes a population of cells that has been treated with identical media, viral induction, nucleic acid sequences, temperature, confluency, flask size, pH, etc., with the exception of the addition of the genome editing components. Any method known in the art can be used to measure restoration of USH2A gene or usherin protein expression or activity, for example Western Blot analysis of the usherin protein or real time PCR for quantifying USH2A mRNA.

The term “isolated cell” refers to a cell that has been removed from an organism in which it was originally found, or a descendant of such a cell. Optionally, the cell can be cultured in vitro, e.g., under defined conditions or in the presence of other cells. Optionally, the cell can be later introduced into a second organism or re-introduced into the organism from which it (or the cell from which it is descended) was isolated.

The term “isolated population” with respect to an isolated population of cells refers to a population of cells that has been removed and separated from a mixed or heterogeneous population of cells. In some cases, the isolated population can be a substantially pure population of cells, as compared to the heterogeneous population from which the cells were isolated or enriched. In some cases, the isolated population can be an isolated population of human progenitor cells, e.g., a substantially pure population of human progenitor cells, as compared to a heterogeneous population of cells comprising human progenitor cells and cells from which the human progenitor cells were derived.

The term “substantially enhanced,” with respect to a particular cell population, refers to a population of cells in which the occurrence of a particular type of cell is increased relative to pre-existing or reference levels, by at least 2-fold, at least 3-, at least 4-, at least 5-, at least 6-, at least 7-, at least 8-, at least 9, at least 10-, at least 20-, at least 50-, at least 100-, at least 400-, at least 1000-, at least 5000-, at least 20000-, at least 100000- or more fold depending, e.g., on the desired levels of such cells for ameliorating one or more of Usher Syndrome Type 2A and ARRP.

The term “substantially enriched” with respect to a particular cell population, refers to a population of cells that is at least about 10%, about 20%, about 30%, about 40%, about 50%, about 60%, about 70% or more with respect to the cells making up a total cell population.

The terms “substantially pure” with respect to a particular cell population, refers to a population of cells that is at least about 75%, at least about 85%, at least about 90%, or at least about 95% pure, with respect to the cells making up a total cell population. That is, the terms “substantially pure” or “essentially purified,” with regard to a population of progenitor cells, refers to a population of cells that contain fewer than about 20%, about 15%, about 10%, about 9%, about 8%, about 7%, about 6%, about 5%, about 4%, about 3%, about 2%, about 1%, or less than 1%, of cells that are not progenitor cells as defined by the terms herein.

Delivery

Guide RNA polynucleotides (RNA or DNA) and/or endonuclease polynucleotide(s) (RNA or DNA) can be delivered by viral or non-viral delivery vehicles known in the art. Alternatively, endonuclease polypeptide(s) can be delivered by viral or non-viral delivery vehicles known in the art, such as electroporation or lipid nanoparticles. In further alternative aspects, the DNA endonuclease can be delivered as one or more polypeptides, either alone or pre-complexed with one or more guide RNAs, or one or more crRNA together with a tracrRNA.

Polynucleotides can be delivered by non-viral delivery vehicles including, but not limited to, nanoparticles, liposomes, ribonucleoproteins, positively charged peptides, small molecule RNA-conjugates, aptamer-RNA chimeras, and RNA-fusion protein complexes. Some exemplary non-viral delivery vehicles are described in Peer and Lieberman, Gene Therapy, 18: 1127-1133 (2011) (which focuses on non-viral delivery vehicles for siRNA that are also useful for delivery of other polynucleotides).

Polynucleotides, such as guide RNA, sgRNA, and mRNA encoding an endonuclease, can be delivered to a cell or a patient by a lipid nanoparticle (LNP).

A LNP refers to any particle having a diameter of less than 1000 nm, 500 nm, 250 nm, 200 nm, 150 nm, 100 nm, 75 nm, 50 nm, or 25 nm. Alternatively, a nanoparticle can range in size from 1-1000 nm, 1-500 nm, 1-250 nm, 25-200 nm, 25-100 nm, 35-75 nm, or 25-60 nm.

LNPs can be made from cationic, anionic, or neutral lipids. Neutral lipids, such as the fusogenic phospholipid DOPE or the membrane component cholesterol, can be included in LNPs as ‘helper lipids’ to enhance transfection activity and nanoparticle stability. Limitations of cationic lipids include low efficacy owing to poor stability and rapid clearance, as well as the generation of inflammatory or anti-inflammatory responses.

LNPs can also be comprised of hydrophobic lipids, hydrophilic lipids, or both hydrophobic and hydrophilic lipids.

Any lipid or combination of lipids that are known in the art can be used to produce a LNP. Examples of lipids used to produce LNPs are: DOTMA, DOSPA, DOTAP, DMRIE, DC-cholesterol, DOTAP-cholesterol, GAP-DMORIE-DPyPE, and GL67A-DOPE-DMPE-polyethylene glycol (PEG). Examples of cationic lipids are: 98N12-5, C12-200, DLin-KC2-DMA (KC2), DLin-MC3-DMA (MC3), XTC, MD1, and 7C1. Examples of neutral lipids are: DPSC, DPPC, POPC, DOPE, and SM. Examples of PEG-modified lipids are: PEG-DMG, PEG-CerC14, and PEG-CerC20.

The lipids can be combined in any number of molar ratios to produce a LNP. In addition, the polynucleotide(s) can be combined with lipid(s) in a wide range of molar ratios to produce a LNP.

As stated previously, the site-directed polypeptide and genome-targeting nucleic acid can each be administered separately to a cell or a patient. On the other hand, the site-directed polypeptide can be pre-complexed with one or more guide RNAs, or one or more crRNA together with a tracrRNA. The pre-complexed material can then be administered to a cell or a patient. Such pre-complexed material is known as a ribonucleoprotein particle (RNP).

RNA is capable of forming specific interactions with RNA or DNA. While this property is exploited in many biological processes, it also comes with the risk of promiscuous interactions in a nucleic acid-rich cellular environment. One solution to this problem is the formation of ribonucleoprotein particles (RNPs), in which the RNA is pre-complexed with an endonuclease. Another benefit of the RNP is protection of the RNA from degradation.

The endonuclease in the RNP can be modified or unmodified. Likewise, the gRNA, crRNA, tracrRNA, or sgRNA can be modified or unmodified. Numerous modifications are known in the art and can be used.

The endonuclease and sgRNA can be generally combined in a 1:1 molar ratio. Alternatively, the endonuclease, crRNA and tracrRNA can be generally combined in a 1:1:1 molar ratio. However, a wide range of molar ratios can be used to produce a RNP.

AAV (Adeno Associated Virus)

A recombinant adeno-associated virus (AAV) vector can be used for delivery. Techniques to produce rAAV particles, in which an AAV genome to be packaged that includes the polynucleotide to be delivered, rep and cap genes, and helper virus functions are provided to a cell are standard in the art. Production of rAAV typically requires that the following components are present within a single cell (denoted herein as a packaging cell): a rAAV genome, AAV rep and cap genes separate from (i.e., not in) the rAAV genome, and helper virus functions. The AAV rep and cap genes can be from any AAV serotype for which recombinant virus can be derived, and can be from a different AAV serotype than the rAAV genome ITRs, including, but not limited to, AAV serotypes described herein. Production of pseudotyped rAAV is disclosed in, for example, international patent application publication number WO 01/83692.

AAV Serotypes

AAV particles packaging polynucleotides encoding compositions of the present disclosure, e.g., endonucleases, donor sequences, or RNA guide molecules, of the present disclosure can comprise or be derived from any natural or recombinant AAV serotype. According to the present disclosure, the AAV particles can utilize or be based on a serotype selected from any of the following serotypes, and variants thereof including but not limited to AAV1, AAV10, AAV106.1/hu.37, AAV11, AAV114.3/hu.40, AAV12, AAV127.2/hu.41, AAV127.5/hu.42, AAV128.1/hu.43, AAV128.3/hu.44, AAV130.4/hu.48, AAV145.1/hu.53, AAV145.5/hu.54, AAV145.6/hu.55, AAV16.12/hu.11, AAV16.3, AAV16.8/hu.10, AAV161.10/hu.60, AAV161.6/hu.61, AAV1-7/rh.48, AAV1-8/rh.49, AAV2, AAV2.5T, AAV2-15/rh.62, AAV223.1, AAV223.2, AAV223.4, AAV223.5, AAV223.6, AAV223.7, AAV2-3/rh.61, AAV24.1, AAV2-4/rh.50, AAV2-5/rh.51, AAV27.3, AAV29.3/bb.1, AAV29.5/bb.2, AAV2G9, AAV-2-pre-miRNA-101, AAV3, AAV3.1/hu.6, AAV3.1/hu.9, AAV3-11/rh.53, AAV3-3, AAV33.12/hu.17, AAV33.4/hu.15, AAV33.8/hu.16, AAV3-9/rh.52, AAV3a, AAV3b, AAV4, AAV4-19/rh.55, AAV42.12, AAV42-10, AAV42-11, AAV42-12, AAV42-13, AAV42-15, AAV42-1b, AAV42-2, AAV42-3a, AAV42-3b, AAV42-4, AAV42-5a, AAV42-5b, AAV42-6b, AAV42-8, AAV42-aa, AAV43-1, AAV43-12, AAV43-20, AAV43-21, AAV43-23, AAV43-25, AAV43-5, AAV4-4, AAV44.1, AAV44.2, AAV44.5, AAV46.2/hu.28, AAV46.6/hu.29, AAV4-8/r11.64, AAV4-8/rh.64, AAV4-9/rh.54, AAV5, AAV52.1/hu.20, AAV52/hu.19, AAV5-22/rh.58, AAV5-3/rh.57, AAV54.1/hu.21, AAV54.2/hu.22, AAV54.4R/hu.27, AAV54.5/hu.23, AAV54.7/hu.24, AAV58.2/hu.25, AAV6, AAV6.1, AAV6.1.2, AAV6.2, AAV7, AAV7.2, AAV7.3/hu.7, AAV8, AAV-8b, AAV-8h, AAV9, AAV9.11, AAV9.13, AAV9.16, AAV9.24, AAV9.45, AAV9.47, AAV9.61, AAV9.68, AAV9.84, AAV9.9, AAVA3.3, AAVA3.4, AAVA3.5, AAVA3.7, AAV-b, AAVC1, AAVC2, AAVC5, AAVCh.5, AAVCh.5R1, AAVcy.2, AAVcy.3, AAVcy.4, AAVcy.5, AAVCy.5R1, AAVCy.5R2, AAVCy.5R3, AAVCy.5R4, AAVcy.6, AAV-DJ, AAV-DJ8, AAVF3, AAVFS, AAV-h, AAVH-1/hu.1, AAVH2, AAVH-5/hu.3, AAVH6, AAVhE1.1, AAVhER1.14, AAVhEr1.16, AAVhEr1.18, AAVhER1.23, AAVhEr1.35, AAVhEr1.36, AAVhEr1.5, AAVhEr1.7, AAVhEr1.8, AAVhEr2.16, AAVhEr2.29, AAVhEr2.30, AAVhEr2.31, AAVhEr2.36, AAVhEr2.4, AAVhEr3.1, AAVhu.1, AAVhu.10, AAVhu.11, AAVhu.11, AAVhu.12, AAVhu.13, AAVhu.14/9, AAVhu.15, AAVhu.16, AAVhu.17, AAVhu.18, AAVhu.19, AAVhu.2, AAVhu.20, AAVhu.21, AAVhu.22, AAVhu.23.2, AAVhu.24, AAVhu.25, AAVhu.27, AAVhu.28, AAVhu.29, AAVhu.29R, AAVhu.3, AAVhu.31, AAVhu.32, AAVhu.34, AAVhu.35, AAVhu.37, AAVhu.39, AAVhu.4, AAVhu.40, AAVhu.41, AAVhu.42, AAVhu.43, AAVhu.44, AAVhu.44R1, AAVhu.44R2, AAVhu.44R3, AAVhu.45, AAVhu.46, AAVhu.47, AAVhu.48, AAVhu.48R1, AAVhu.48R2, AAVhu.48R3, AAVhu.49, AAVhu.5, AAVhu.51, AAVhu.52, AAVhu.53, AAVhu.54, AAVhu.55, AAVhu.56, AAVhu.57, AAVhu.58, AAVhu.6, AAVhu.60, AAVhu.61, AAVhu.63, AAVhu.64, AAVhu.66, AAVhu.67, AAVhu.7, AAVhu.8, AAVhu.9, AAVhu.t 19, AAVLG-10/rh.40, AAVLG-4/rh.38, AAVLG-9/hu.39, AAVLG-9/hu.39, AAV-LK01, AAV-LK02, AAVLK03, AAV-LK03, AAV-LK04, AAV-LK05, AAV-LK06, AAV-LK07, AAV-LK08, AAV-LK09, AAV-LK10, AAV-LK11, AAV-LK12, AAV-LK13, AAV-LK14, AAV-LK15, AAV-LK17, AAV-LK18, AAV-LK19, AAVN721-8/rh.43, AAV-PAEC, AAV-PAEC11, AAV-PAEC12, AAV-PAEC2, AAV-PAEC4, AAV-PAEC6, AAV-PAEC7, AAV-PAEC8, AAVpi.1, AAVpi.2, AAVpi.3, AAVrh.10, AAVrh.12, AAVrh.13, AAVrh.13R, AAVrh.14, AAVrh.17, AAVrh.18, AAVrh.19, AAVrh.2, AAVrh.20, AAVrh.21, AAVrh.22, AAVrh.23, AAVrh.24, AAVrh.25, AAVrh.2R, AAVrh.31, AAVrh.32, AAVrh.33, AAVrh.34, AAVrh.35, AAVrh.36, AAVrh.37, AAVrh.37R2, AAVrh.38, AAVrh.39, AAVrh.40, AAVrh.43, AAVrh.44, AAVrh.45, AAVrh.46, AAVrh.47, AAVrh.48, AAVrh.48, AAVrh.48.1, AAVrh.48.1.2, AAVrh.48.2, AAVrh.49, AAVrh.50, AAVrh.51, AAVrh.52, AAVrh.53, AAVrh.54, AAVrh.55, AAVrh.56, AAVrh.57, AAVrh.58, AAVrh.59, AAVrh.60, AAVrh.61, AAVrh.62, AAVrh.64, AAVrh.64R1, AAVrh.64R2, AAVrh.65, AAVrh.67, AAVrh.68, AAVrh.69, AAVrh.70, AAVrh.72, AAVrh.73, AAVrh.74, AAVrh.8, AAVrh.8R, AAVrh8R, AAVrh8R A586R mutant, AAVrh8R R533A mutant, BAAV, BNP61 AAV, BNP62 AAV, BNP63 AAV, bovine AAV, caprine AAV, Japanese AAV 10, true type AAV (ttAAV), UPENN AAV 10, AAV-LK16, AAAV, AAV Shuffle 100-1, AAV Shuffle 100-2, AAV Shuffle 100-3, AAV Shuffle 100-7, AAV Shuffle 10-2, AAV Shuffle 10-6, AAV Shuffle 10-8, AAV SM 100-10, AAV SM 100-3, AAV SM 10-1, AAV SM 10-2, and/or AAV SM 10-8.

In some examples, the AAV serotype can be, or have, a mutation in the AAV9 sequence as described by N Pulicherla et al. (Molecular Therapy 19(6):1070-1078 (2011), such as but not limited to, AAV9.9, AAV9.11, AAV9.13, AAV9.16, AAV9.24, AAV9.45, AAV9.47, AAV9.61, AAV9.68, AAV9.84.

In some examples, the AAV serotype can be, or have, a sequence as described in U.S. Pat. No. 6,156,303, such as, but not limited to, AAV3B (SEQ ID NO: 1 and 10 of U.S. Pat. No. 6,156,303), AAV6 (SEQ ID NO: 2, 7 and 11 of U.S. Pat. No. 6,156,303), AAV2 (SEQ ID NO: 3 and 8 of U.S. Pat. No. 6,156,303), AAV3A (SEQ ID NO: 4 and 9, of U.S. Pat. No. 6,156,303), or derivatives thereof.

In some examples, the serotype can be AAVDJ or a variant thereof, such as AAVDJ8 (or AAV-DJ8), as described by Grimm et al. (Journal of Virology 82(12): 5887-5911 (2008)). The amino acid sequence of AAVDJ8 can comprise two or more mutations in order to remove the heparin binding domain (HBD). As a non-limiting example, the AAV-DJ sequence described as SEQ ID NO: 1 in U.S. Pat. No. 7,588,772, can comprise two mutations: (1) R587Q where arginine (R; Arg) at amino acid 587 is changed to glutamine (Q; Gln) and (2) R590T where arginine (R; Arg) at amino acid 590 is changed to threonine (T; Thr). As another non-limiting example, can comprise three mutations: (1) K406R where lysine (K; Lys) at amino acid 406 is changed to arginine (R; Arg), (2) R587Q where arginine (R; Arg) at amino acid 587 is changed to glutamine (Q; Gln) and (3) R590T where arginine (R; Arg) at amino acid 590 is changed to threonine (T; Thr).

In some examples, the AAV serotype can be, or have, a sequence as described in International Publication No. WO2015121501, such as, but not limited to, true type AAV (ttAAV) (SEQ ID NO: 2 of WO2015121501), “UPenn AAV10” (SEQ ID NO: 8 of WO2015121501), “Japanese AAV10” (SEQ ID NO: 9 of WO2015121501), or variants thereof.

According to the present disclosure, AAV capsid serotype selection or use can be from a variety of species. In one example, the AAV can be an avian AAV (AAAV). The AAAV serotype can be, or have, a sequence as described in U.S. Pat. No. 9,238,800, such as, but not limited to, AAAV (SEQ ID NO: 1, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, and 14 of U.S. Pat. No. 9,238,800), or variants thereof.

In one example, the AAV can be a bovine AAV (BAAV). The BAAV serotype can be, or have, a sequence as described in U.S. Pat. No. 9,193,769, such as, but not limited to, BAAV (SEQ ID NO: 1 and 6 of U.S. Pat. No. 9,193,769), or variants thereof. The BAAV serotype can be or have a sequence as described in U.S. Pat. No. 7,427,396, such as, but not limited to, BAAV (SEQ ID NO: 5 and 6 of U.S. Pat. No. 7,427,396), or variants thereof.

In one example, the AAV can be a caprine AAV. The caprine AAV serotype can be, or have, a sequence as described in U.S. Pat. No. 7,427,396, such as, but not limited to, caprine AAV (SEQ ID NO: 3 of U.S. Pat. No. 7,427,396), or variants thereof.

In other examples the AAV can be engineered as a hybrid AAV from two or more parental serotypes. In one example, the AAV can be AAV2G9 which comprises sequences from AAV2 and AAV9. The AAV2G9 AAV serotype can be, or have, a sequence as described in United States Patent Publication No. US20160017005.

In one example, the AAV can be a serotype generated by the AAV9 capsid library with mutations in amino acids 390-627 (VP1 numbering) as described by Pulicherla et al. (Molecular Therapy 19(6):1070-1078 (2011). The serotype and corresponding nucleotide and amino acid substitutions can be, but is not limited to, AAV9.1 (G1594C; D532H), AAV6.2 (T1418A and T1436X; V473D and I479K), AAV9.3 (T1238A; F413Y), AAV9.4 (T1250C and A1617T; F417S), AAV9.5 (A1235G, A1314T, A1642G, C1760T; Q412R, T548A, A587V), AAV9.6 (T1231A; F411I), AAV9.9 (G1203A, G1785T; W595C), AAV9.10 (A1500G, T1676C; M559T), AAV9.11 (A1425T, A1702C, A1769T; T568P, Q590L), AAV9.13 (A1369C, A1720T; N457H, T574S), AAV9.14 (T1340A, T1362C, T1560C, G1713A; L447H), AAV9.16 (A1775T; Q592L), AAV9.24 (T1507C, T1521G; W503R), AAV9.26 (A1337G, A1769C; Y446C, Q590P), AAV9.33 (A1667C; D556A), AAV9.34 (A1534G, C1794T; N512D), AAV9.35 (A1289T, T1450A, C1494T, A1515T, C1794A, G1816A; Q430L, Y484N, N98K, V6061), AAV9.40 (A1694T, E565V), AAV9.41 (A1348T, T1362C; T450S), AAV9.44 (A1684C, A1701T, A1737G; N562H, K567N), AAV9.45 (A1492T, C1804T; N498Y, L602F), AAV9.46 (G1441C, T1525C, T1549G; G481R, W509R, L517V), 9.47 (G1241A, G1358A, A1669G, C1745T; S414N, G453D, K557E, T582I), AAV9.48 (C1445T, A1736T; P482L, Q579L), AAV9.50 (A1638T, C1683T, T1805A; Q546H, L602H), AAV9.53 (G1301A, A1405C, C1664T, G1811T; R134Q, S469R, A555V, G604V), AAV9.54 (C1531A, T1609A; L511I, L537M), AAV9.55 (T1605A; F535L), AAV9.58 (C1475T, C1579A; T492I, H527N), AAV.59 (T1336C; Y446H), AAV9.61 (A1493T; N498I), AAV9.64 (C1531A, A1617T; L511I), AAV9.65 (C1335T, T1530C, C1568A; A523D), AAV9.68 (C1510A; P504T), AAV9.80 (G1441A;G481R), AAV9.83 (C1402A, A1500T; P468T, E500D), AAV9.87 (T1464C, T1468C; S490P), AAV9.90 (A1196T; Y399F), AAV9.91 (T1316G, A1583T, C1782G, T1806C; L439R, K528I), AAV9.93 (A1273G, A1421G, A1638C, C1712T, G1732A, A1744T, A1832T; S425G, Q474R, Q546H, P571L, G578R, T582S, D611V), AAV9.94 (A1675T; M559L) and AAV9.95 (T1605A; F535L).

In one example, the AAV can be a serotype comprising at least one AAV capsid CD8+ T-cell epitope. As a non-limiting example, the serotype can be AAV1, AAV2 or AAV8.

In one example, the AAV can be a variant, such as PHP.A or PHP.B as described in Deverman. 2016. Nature Biotechnology. 34(2): 204-209.

In one example, the AAV can be a serotype selected from any of those found in SEQ ID NOs: 4697-5265 and Table 3.

In one example, the AAV can be encoded by a sequence, fragment or variant as described in SEQ ID NOs: 4697-5265 and Table 3.

A method of generating a packaging cell involves creating a cell line that stably expresses all of the necessary components for AAV particle production. For example, a plasmid (or multiple plasmids) comprising a rAAV genome lacking AAV rep and cap genes, AAV rep and cap genes separate from the rAAV genome, and a selectable marker, such as a neomycin resistance gene, are integrated into the genome of a cell. AAV genomes have been introduced into bacterial plasmids by procedures such as GC tailing (Samulski et al., 1982, Proc. Natl. Acad. S6. USA, 79:2077-2081), addition of synthetic linkers containing restriction endonuclease cleavage sites (Laughlin et al., 1983, Gene, 23:65-73) or by direct, blunt-end ligation (Senapathy & Carter, 1984, J. Biol. Chem., 259:4661-4666). The packaging cell line can then be infected with a helper virus, such as adenovirus. The advantages of this method are that the cells are selectable and are suitable for large-scale production of rAAV. Other examples of suitable methods employ adenovirus or baculovirus, rather than plasmids, to introduce rAAV genomes and/or rep and cap genes into packaging cells.

General principles of rAAV production are reviewed in, for example, Carter, 1992, Current Opinions in Biotechnology, 1533-539; and Muzyczka, 1992, Curr. Topics in Microbial. and Immunol., 158:97-129). Various approaches are described in Ratschin et al., Mol. Cell. Biol. 4:2072 (1984); Hermonat et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 81:6466 (1984); Tratschin et al., Mol. Cell. Biol. 5:3251 (1985); McLaughlin et al., J. Virol., 62:1963 (1988); and Lebkowski et al., 1988 Mol. Cell. Biol., 7:349 (1988). Samulski et al. (1989, J. Virol., 63:3822-3828); U.S. Pat. No. 5,173,414; WO 95/13365 and corresponding U.S. Pat. No. 5,658,776; WO 95/13392; WO 96/17947; PCT/US98/18600; WO 97/09441 (PCT/US96/14423); WO 97/08298 (PCT/US96/13872); WO 97/21825 (PCT/US96/20777); WO 97/06243 (PCT/FR96/01064); WO 99/11764; Perrin et al. (1995) Vaccine 13:1244-1250; Paul et al. (1993) Human Gene Therapy 4:609-615; Clark et al. (1996) Gene Therapy 3:1124-1132; U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,786,211; 5,871,982; and 6,258,595.

AAV vector serotypes can be matched to target cell types. For example, the following exemplary cell types can be transduced by the indicated AAV serotypes among others.

TABLE 3 Tissue/Cell Types and Serotypes Tissue/Cell Type Serotype Liver AAV3, AA5, AAV8, AAV9 Skeletal muscle AAV1, AAV7, AAV6, AAV8, AAV9 Central nervous system AAV1, AAV4, AAV5, AAV8, AAV9 RPE AAV5, AAV4, AAV2, AAV8, AAV9 AAVrh8r Photoreceptor cells AAV5 , AAV8, AAV9, AAVrh8R Lung AAV9, AAV5 Heart AAV8 Pancreas AAV8 Kidney AAV2, AAV8

In addition to adeno-associated viral vectors, other viral vectors can be used. Such viral vectors include, but are not limited to, lentivirus, alphavirus, enterovirus, pestivirus, baculovirus, herpesvirus, Epstein Barr virus, papovavirusr, poxvirus, vaccinia virus, and herpes simplex virus.

In some cases, Cas9 mRNA, sgRNA targeting one or two loci in USH2A gene, and donor DNA can each be separately formulated into lipid nanoparticles, or are all co-formulated into one lipid nanoparticle.

In some cases, Cas9 mRNA can be formulated in a lipid nanoparticle, while sgRNA and donor DNA can be delivered in an AAV vector.

Options are available to deliver the Cas9 nuclease as a DNA plasmid, as mRNA or as a protein. The guide RNA can be expressed from the same DNA, or can also be delivered as an RNA. The RNA can be chemically modified to alter or improve its half-life, or decrease the likelihood or degree of immune response. The endonuclease protein can be complexed with the gRNA prior to delivery. Viral vectors allow efficient delivery; split versions of Cas9 and smaller orthologs of Cas9 can be packaged in AAV, as can donors for HDR. A range of non-viral delivery methods also exist that can deliver each of these components, or non-viral and viral methods can be employed in tandem. For example, nanoparticles can be used to deliver the protein and guide RNA, while AAV can be used to deliver a donor DNA.

Lentivirus

In some aspects, lentiviral vectors or particles can be used as delivery vehicles. Lentiviruses are subgroup of the Retroviridae family of viruses. Lentiviral particles are able to integrate their genetic material into the genome of a target/host cell. Examples of lentivirus include the Human Immunodeficiency Viruses: HIV-1 and HIV-2, Jembrana Disease Virus (JDV), equine infectious anemia virus (EIAV), equine infectious anemia virus, visna-maedi and caprine arthritis encephalitis virus (CAEV), the Simian Immunodeficiency Virus (SIV), feline immunodeficiency virus (FIV), bovine immunodeficiency virus (BIV). LV's are capable of infecting both dividing and non-dividing cells due to their unique ability to pass through a target cell's intact nuclear membrane Greenberg et al., University of Berkeley, Calif.; 2006). Lentiviral particles that form the gene delivery vehicle are replication defective and are generated by attenuating the HIV virulence genes. For example, the genes Vpu, Vpr, Nef, Env, and Tat are excised making the vector biologically safe. Lentiviral vehicles, for example, derived from HIV-1/HIV-2 can mediate the efficient delivery, integration and long-term expression of transgenes into non-dividing cells. As used herein, the term “recombinant” refers to a vector or other nucleic acid containing both lentiviral sequences and non-lentiviral retroviral sequences.

In order to produce a lentivirus that is capable of infecting host cells, three types of vectors need to be co-expressed in virus producing cells: a backbone vector containing the transgene of interests and self-inactivating 3′-LTR regions, one construct expressing viral structure proteins, and one vector encoding vesicular stomatitis virus glycoprotein (VSVG) for encapsulation (Naldini, L. et al., Science 1996; 272, 263-267). Separation of the Rev gene from other structural genes further increases the biosafety by reducing the possibility of reverse recombination. Cell lines that can be used to produce high-titer lentiviral particles may include, but are not limited to 293T cells, 293FT cells, and 293SF-3F6 cells (Witting et al., Human Gene Therapy, 2012; 23: 243-249; Ansorge et al., Journal of Genetic Medicine, 2009; 11: 868-876).

Methods for generating recombinant lentiviral particles are discussed in the art, for example, WO 2013076309 (PCT/EP2012/073645); WO 2009153563 (PCT/GB2009/001527); U.S. Pat. Nos. 7,629,153; and 6,808,905.

Cell types such as photoreceptors, retinal pigment epithelium, and ganglion cells have been successfully targeted with lentivirus (LV) vector. The efficiency of delivery to photoreceptors and ganglion cells is significantly higher with AAV than LV vectors.

Pharmaceutically Acceptable Carriers

The ex vivo methods of administering progenitor cells to a subject contemplated herein involve the use of therapeutic compositions comprising progenitor cells.

Therapeutic compositions can contain a physiologically tolerable carrier together with the cell composition, and optionally at least one additional bioactive agent as described herein, dissolved or dispersed therein as an active ingredient. In some cases, the therapeutic composition is not substantially immunogenic when administered to a mammal or human patient for therapeutic purposes, unless so desired.

In general, the progenitor cells described herein can be administered as a suspension with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. One of skill in the art will recognize that a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier to be used in a cell composition will not include buffers, compounds, cryopreservation agents, preservatives, or other agents in amounts that substantially interfere with the viability of the cells to be delivered to the subject. A formulation comprising cells can include e.g., osmotic buffers that permit cell membrane integrity to be maintained, and optionally, nutrients to maintain cell viability or enhance engraftment upon administration. Such formulations and suspensions are known to those of skill in the art and/or can be adapted for use with the progenitor cells, as described herein, using routine experimentation.

A cell composition can also be emulsified or presented as a liposome composition, provided that the emulsification procedure does not adversely affect cell viability. The cells and any other active ingredient can be mixed with excipients that are pharmaceutically acceptable and compatible with the active ingredient, and in amounts suitable for use in the therapeutic methods described herein.

Additional agents included in a cell composition can include pharmaceutically acceptable salts of the components therein. Pharmaceutically acceptable salts include the acid addition salts (formed with the free amino groups of the polypeptide) that are formed with inorganic acids, such as, for example, hydrochloric or phosphoric acids, or such organic acids as acetic, tartaric, mandelic and the like. Salts formed with the free carboxyl groups can also be derived from inorganic bases, such as, for example, sodium, potassium, ammonium, calcium or ferric hydroxides, and such organic bases as isopropylamine, trimethylamine, 2-ethylamino ethanol, histidine, procaine and the like.

Physiologically tolerable carriers are well known in the art. Exemplary liquid carriers are sterile aqueous solutions that contain no materials in addition to the active ingredients and water, or contain a buffer such as sodium phosphate at physiological pH value, physiological saline or both, such as phosphate-buffered saline. Still further, aqueous carriers can contain more than one buffer salt, as well as salts such as sodium and potassium chlorides, dextrose, polyethylene glycol and other solutes. Liquid compositions can also contain liquid phases in addition to and to the exclusion of water. Exemplary of such additional liquid phases are glycerin, vegetable oils such as cottonseed oil, and water-oil emulsions. The amount of an active compound used in the cell compositions that is effective in the treatment of a particular disorder or condition can depend on the nature of the disorder or condition, and can be determined by standard clinical techniques.

Guide RNA Formulation

Guide RNAs of the present disclosure can be formulated with pharmaceutically acceptable excipients such as carriers, solvents, stabilizers, adjuvants, diluents, etc., depending upon the particular mode of administration and dosage form. Guide RNA compositions can be formulated to achieve a physiologically compatible pH, and range from a pH of about 3 to a pH of about 11, about pH 3 to about pH 7, depending on the formulation and route of administration. In some cases, the pH can be adjusted to a range from about pH 5.0 to about pH 8. In some cases, the compositions can comprise a therapeutically effective amount of at least one compound as described herein, together with one or more pharmaceutically acceptable excipients. Optionally, the compositions can comprise a combination of the compounds described herein, or can include a second active ingredient useful in the treatment or prevention of bacterial growth (for example and without limitation, anti-bacterial or anti-microbial agents), or can include a combination of reagents of the present disclosure.

Suitable excipients include, for example, carrier molecules that include large, slowly metabolized macromolecules such as proteins, polysaccharides, polylactic acids, polyglycolic acids, polymeric amino acids, amino acid copolymers, and inactive virus particles. Other exemplary excipients can include antioxidants (for example and without limitation, ascorbic acid), chelating agents (for example and without limitation, EDTA), carbohydrates (for example and without limitation, dextrin, hydroxyalkylcellulose, and hydroxyalkylmethylcellulose), stearic acid, liquids (for example and without limitation, oils, water, saline, glycerol and ethanol), wetting or emulsifying agents, pH buffering substances, and the like.

Administration & Efficacy

The terms “administering,” “introducing” and “transplanting” can be used interchangeably in the context of the placement of cells, e.g., progenitor cells, into a subject, by a method or route that results in at least partial localization of the introduced cells at a desired site, such as a site of injury or repair, such that a desired effect(s) is produced. The cells e.g., progenitor cells, or their differentiated progeny can be administered by any appropriate route that results in delivery to a desired location in the subject where at least a portion of the implanted cells or components of the cells remain viable. The period of viability of the cells after administration to a subject can be as short as a few hours, e.g., twenty-four hours, to a few days, to as long as several years, or even the life time of the patient, i.e., long-term engraftment. For example, in some aspects described herein, an effective amount of photoreceptor cells or retinal progenitor cells is administered via a systemic route of administration, such as an intraperitoneal or intravenous route.

The terms “administering,” “introducing” and “transplanting” can also be used interchangeably in the context of the placement of at least one of a gRNA, sgRNA, and an endonuclease into a subject, by a method or route that results in at least partial localization of the introduced gRNA, sgRNA, and/or endonuclease at a desired site, such as a site of injury or repair, such that a desired effect(s) is produced. The gRNA, sgRNA, and/or endonuclease can be administered by any appropriate route that results in delivery to a desired location in the subject.

The terms “individual,” “subject,” “host” and “patient” are used interchangeably herein and refer to any subject for whom diagnosis, treatment or therapy is desired. In some aspects, the subject is a mammal. In some aspects, the subject is a human being.

When provided prophylactically, progenitor cells described herein can be administered to a subject in advance of any symptom of one or more of Usher Syndrome Type 2A and ARRP. Accordingly, the prophylactic administration of a progenitor cell population serves to prevent one or more of Usher Syndrome Type 2A and ARRP.

A progenitor cell population being administered according to the methods described herein can comprise allogeneic progenitor cells obtained from one or more donors. Such progenitors can be of any cellular or tissue origin, e.g., liver, muscle, cardiac, etc. “Allogeneic” refers to a progenitor cell or biological samples comprising progenitor cells obtained from one or more different donors of the same species, where the genes at one or more loci are not identical. For example, a photoreceptor or retinal progenitor cell population being administered to a subject can be derived from one more unrelated donor subjects, or from one or more non-identical siblings. In some cases, syngeneic progenitor cell populations can be used, such as those obtained from genetically identical animals, or from identical twins. The progenitor cells can be autologous cells; that is, the progenitor cells are obtained or isolated from a subject and administered to the same subject, i.e., the donor and recipient are the same.

The term “effective amount” refers to the amount of a population of progenitor cells or their progeny needed to prevent or alleviate at least one or more signs or symptoms of one or more of Usher Syndrome Type 2A and ARRP, and relates to a sufficient amount of a composition to provide the desired effect, e.g., to treat a subject having one or more of Usher Syndrome Type 2A and ARRP. The term “therapeutically effective amount” therefore refers to an amount of progenitor cells or a composition comprising progenitor cells that is sufficient to promote a particular effect when administered to a typical subject, such as one who has or is at risk for one or more of Usher Syndrome Type 2A and ARRP. An effective amount would also include an amount sufficient to prevent or delay the development of a symptom of the disease, alter the course of a symptom of the disease (for example but not limited to, slow the progression of a symptom of the disease), or reverse a symptom of the disease. It is understood that for any given case, an appropriate “effective amount” can be determined by one of ordinary skill in the art using routine experimentation.

For use in the various aspects described herein, an effective amount of progenitor cells comprises at least 10² progenitor cells, at least 5×10² progenitor cells, at least 10³ progenitor cells, at least 5×10³ progenitor cells, at least 10⁴ progenitor cells, at least 5×10⁴ progenitor cells, at least 10⁵ progenitor cells, at least 2×10⁵ progenitor cells, at least 3×10⁵ progenitor cells, at least 4×10⁵ progenitor cells, at least 5×10⁵ progenitor cells, at least 6×10⁵ progenitor cells, at least 7×10⁵ progenitor cells, at least 8×10⁵ progenitor cells, at least 9×10⁵ progenitor cells, at least 1×10⁶ progenitor cells, at least 2×10⁶ progenitor cells, at least 3×10⁶ progenitor cells, at least 4×10⁶ progenitor cells, at least 5×10⁶ progenitor cells, at least 6×10⁶ progenitor cells, at least 7×10⁶ progenitor cells, at least 8×10⁶ progenitor cells, at least 9×10⁶ progenitor cells, or multiples thereof. The progenitor cells can be derived from one or more donors, or can be obtained from an autologous source. In some examples described herein, the progenitor cells can be expanded in culture prior to administration to a subject in need thereof.

Modest and incremental increases in the levels of functional usherin protein expressed in cells of patients having one or more of Usher Syndrome Type 2A and ARRP can be beneficial for ameliorating one or more symptoms of the disease, for increasing long-term survival, and/or for reducing side effects associated with other treatments. Upon administration of such cells to human patients, the presence of progenitors that are producing increased levels of functional usherin protein is beneficial. In some cases, effective treatment of a subject gives rise to at least about 3%, 5% or 7% functional usherin protein relative to total usherin in the treated subject. In some examples, functional usherin will be at least about 10% of total usherin. In some examples, functional usherin protein will be at least about 20% to 30% of total usherin protein. Similarly, the introduction of even relatively limited subpopulations of cells having significantly elevated levels of functional usherin protein can be beneficial in various patients because in some situations normalized cells will have a selective advantage relative to diseased cells. However, even modest levels of progenitors with elevated levels of functional usherin protein can be beneficial for ameliorating one or more aspects of one or more of Usher Syndrome Type 2A and ARRP in patients. In some examples, about 10%, about 20%, about 30%, about 40%, about 50%, about 60%, about 70%, about 80%, about 90% or more of the photoreceptor cells or retinal progenitor cells in patients to whom such cells are administered are producing increased levels of functional usherin protein.

“Administered” refers to the delivery of a progenitor cell composition into a subject by a method or route that results in at least partial localization of the cell composition at a desired site. A cell composition can be administered by any appropriate route that results in effective treatment in the subject, i.e., administration results in delivery to a desired location in the subject where at least a portion of the composition delivered, i.e., at least 1×10⁴ cells are delivered to the desired site for a period of time.

In one aspect of the method, the pharmaceutical composition can be administered via a route such as, but not limited to, enteral (into the intestine), gastroenteral, epidural (into the dura matter), oral (by way of the mouth), transdermal, peridural, intracerebral (into the cerebrum), intracerebroventricular (into the cerebral ventricles), epicutaneous (application onto the skin), intradermal, (into the skin itself), subcutaneous (under the skin), nasal administration (through the nose), intravenous (into a vein), intravenous bolus, intravenous drip, intraarterial (into an artery), intramuscular (into a muscle), intracardiac (into the heart), intraosseous infusion (into the bone marrow), intrathecal (into the spinal canal), intraperitoneal, (infusion or injection into the peritoneum), intravesical infusion, intravitreal, (through the eye), intracavernous injection (into a pathologic cavity) intracavitary (into the base of the penis), intravaginal administration, intrauterine, extra-amniotic administration, transdermal (diffusion through the intact skin for systemic distribution), transmucosal (diffusion through a mucous membrane), transvaginal, insufflation (snorting), sublingual, sublabial, enema, eye drops (onto the conjunctiva), in ear drops, auricular (in or by way of the ear), buccal (directed toward the cheek), conjunctival, cutaneous, dental (to a tooth or teeth), electro-osmosis, endocervical, endosinusial, endotracheal, extracorporeal, hemodialysis, infiltration, interstitial, intra-abdominal, intra-amniotic, intra-articular, intrabiliary, intrabronchial, intrabursal, intracartilaginous (within a cartilage), intracaudal (within the cauda equine), intracisternal (within the cisterna magna cerebellomedularis), intracorneal (within the cornea), dental intracornal, intracoronary (within the coronary arteries), intracorporus cavernosum (within the dilatable spaces of the corporus cavernosa of the penis), intradiscal (within a disc), intraductal (within a duct of a gland), intraduodenal (within the duodenum), intradural (within or beneath the dura), intraepidermal (to the epidermis), intraesophageal (to the esophagus), intragastric (within the stomach), intragingival (within the gingivae), intraileal (within the distal portion of the small intestine), intralesional (within or introduced directly to a localized lesion), intraluminal (within a lumen of a tube), intralymphatic (within the lymph), intramedullary (within the marrow cavity of a bone), intrameningeal (within the meninges), intramyocardial (within the myocardium), intraocular (within the eye), intraovarian (within the ovary), intrapericardial (within the pericardium), intrapleural (within the pleura), intraprostatic (within the prostate gland), intrapulmonary (within the lungs or its bronchi), intrasinal (within the nasal or periorbital sinuses), intraspinal (within the vertebral column), intrasynovial (within the synovial cavity of a joint), intratendinous (within a tendon), intratesticular (within the testicle), intrathecal (within the cerebrospinal fluid at any level of the cerebrospinal axis), intrathoracic (within the thorax), intratubular (within the tubules of an organ), intratumor (within a tumor), intratympanic (within the aurus media), intravascular (within a vessel or vessels), intraventricular (within a ventricle), iontophoresis (by means of electric current where ions of soluble salts migrate into the tissues of the body), irrigation (to bathe or flush open wounds or body cavities), laryngeal (directly upon the larynx), nasogastric (through the nose and into the stomach), occlusive dressing technique (topical route administration, which is then covered by a dressing that occludes the area), ophthalmic (to the external eye), oropharyngeal (directly to the mouth and pharynx), parenteral, percutaneous, periarticular, peridural, perineural, periodontal, rectal, respiratory (within the respiratory tract by inhaling orally or nasally for local or systemic effect), retrobulbar (behind the pons or behind the eyeball), intramyocardial (entering the myocardium), soft tissue, subarachnoid, subconjunctival, submucosal, topical, transplacental (through or across the placenta), transtracheal (through the wall of the trachea), transtympanic (across or through the tympanic cavity), ureteral (to the ureter), urethral (to the urethra), vaginal, caudal block, diagnostic, nerve block, biliary perfusion, cardiac perfusion, photopheresis and spinal.

Modes of administration include injection, infusion, instillation, and/or ingestion. “Injection” includes, without limitation, intravenous, intramuscular, intra-arterial, intrathecal, intraventricular, intracapsular, intraorbital, intracardiac, intradermal, intraperitoneal, transtracheal, subcutaneous, subcuticular, intraarticular, sub capsular, subretinal, subarachnoid, intraspinal, intracerebro spinal, and intrasternal injection and infusion. In some examples, the route is intravenous. For the delivery of cells, administration by injection or infusion can be made. For the delivery of gRNAs, Cas9, and donor templates, administration can be by injection into the subretinal space, in close proximity to the photoreceptors.

The cells can be administered systemically. The phrases “systemic administration,” “administered systemically”, “peripheral administration” and “administered peripherally” refer to the administration of a population of progenitor cells other than directly into a target site, tissue, or organ, such that it enters, instead, the subject's circulatory system and, thus, is subject to metabolism and other like processes.

The efficacy of a treatment comprising a composition for the treatment of one or more of Usher Syndrome Type 2A and ARRP can be determined by the skilled clinician. However, a treatment is considered “effective treatment,” if any one or all of the signs or symptoms of, as but one example, levels of functional usherin are altered in a beneficial manner (e.g., increased by at least 10%), or other clinically accepted symptoms or markers of disease are improved or ameliorated. Efficacy can also be measured by failure of an individual to worsen as assessed by hospitalization or need for medical interventions (e.g., progression of the disease is halted or at least slowed). Methods of measuring these indicators are known to those of skill in the art and/or described herein. Treatment includes any treatment of a disease in an individual or an animal (some non-limiting examples include a human, or a mammal) and includes: (1) inhibiting the disease, e.g., arresting, or slowing the progression of symptoms; or (2) relieving the disease, e.g., causing regression of symptoms; and (3) preventing or reducing the likelihood of the development of symptoms.

The treatment according to the present disclosure can ameliorate one or more symptoms associated with one or more of Usher Syndrome Type 2A and ARRP by increasing, decreasing or altering the amount of functional usherin in the individual. Signs typically associated with Usher Syndrome Type 2A include for example, hearing loss and an eye disorder called retinitis pigmentosa, which causes night-blindness and a loss of peripheral vision through the progressive degeneration of the retina. Many people with Usher syndrome also have severe balance problems.

Kits

The present disclosure provides kits for carrying out the methods described herein. A kit can include one or more of a genome-targeting nucleic acid, a polynucleotide encoding a genome-targeting nucleic acid, a site-directed polypeptide, a polynucleotide encoding a site-directed polypeptide, and/or any nucleic acid or proteinaceous molecule necessary to carry out the aspects of the methods described herein, or any combination thereof.

A kit can comprise: (1) a vector comprising a nucleotide sequence encoding a genome-targeting nucleic acid, (2) the site-directed polypeptide or a vector comprising a nucleotide sequence encoding the site-directed polypeptide, and (3) a reagent for reconstitution and/or dilution of the vector(s) and or polypeptide.

A kit can comprise: (1) a vector comprising (i) a nucleotide sequence encoding a genome-targeting nucleic acid, and (ii) a nucleotide sequence encoding the site-directed polypeptide; and (2) a reagent for reconstitution and/or dilution of the vector.

In any of the above kits, the kit can comprise a single-molecule guide genome-targeting nucleic acid. In any of the above kits, the kit can comprise a double-molecule genome-targeting nucleic acid. In any of the above kits, the kit can comprise two or more double-molecule guides or single-molecule guides. The kits can comprise a vector that encodes the nucleic acid targeting nucleic acid.

In any of the above kits, the kit can further comprise a polynucleotide to be inserted to effect the desired genetic modification.

Components of a kit can be in separate containers, or combined in a single container.

Any kit described above can further comprise one or more additional reagents, where such additional reagents are selected from a buffer, a buffer for introducing a polypeptide or polynucleotide into a cell, a wash buffer, a control reagent, a control vector, a control RNA polynucleotide, a reagent for in vitro production of the polypeptide from DNA, adaptors for sequencing and the like. A buffer can be a stabilization buffer, a reconstituting buffer, a diluting buffer, or the like. A kit can also comprise one or more components that can be used to facilitate or enhance the on-target binding or the cleavage of DNA by the endonuclease, or improve the specificity of targeting.

In addition to the above-mentioned components, a kit can further comprise instructions for using the components of the kit to practice the methods. The instructions for practicing the methods can be recorded on a suitable recording medium. For example, the instructions can be printed on a substrate, such as paper or plastic, etc. The instructions can be present in the kits as a package insert, in the labeling of the container of the kit or components thereof (i.e., associated with the packaging or sub packaging), etc. The instructions can be present as an electronic storage data file present on a suitable computer readable storage medium, e.g. CD-ROM, diskette, flash drive, etc. In some instances, the actual instructions are not present in the kit, but means for obtaining the instructions from a remote source (e.g. via the Internet), can be provided. An example of this case is a kit that comprises a web address where the instructions can be viewed and/or from which the instructions can be downloaded. As with the instructions, this means for obtaining the instructions can be recorded on a suitable substrate.

Additional Therapeutic Approaches

Gene editing can be conducted using nucleases engineered to target specific sequences. To date there are four major types of nucleases: meganucleases and their derivatives, zinc finger nucleases (ZFNs), transcription activator like effector nucleases (TALENs), and CRISPR-Cas9 nuclease systems. The nuclease platforms vary in difficulty of design, targeting density and mode of action, particularly as the specificity of ZFNs and TALENs is through protein-DNA interactions, while RNA-DNA interactions primarily guide Cas9. Cas9 cleavage also requires an adjacent motif, the PAM, which differs between different CRISPR systems. Cas9 from Streptococcus pyogenes cleaves using a NGG PAM, CRISPR from Neisseria meningitidis can cleave at sites with PAMs including NNNNGATT, NNNNNGTTT and NNNNGCTT. A number of other Cas9 orthologs target protospacer adjacent to alternative PAMs.

CRISPR endonucleases, such as Cas9, can be used in the methods of the present disclosure. However, the teachings described herein, such as therapeutic target sites, could be applied to other forms of endonucleases, such as ZFNs, TALENs, HEs, or MegaTALs, or using combinations of nucleases. However, in order to apply the teachings of the present disclosure to such endonucleases, one would need to, among other things, engineer proteins directed to the specific target sites.

Additional binding domains can be fused to the Cas9 protein to increase specificity. The target sites of these constructs would map to the identified gRNA specified site, but would require additional binding motifs, such as for a zinc finger domain. In the case of Mega-TAL, a meganuclease can be fused to a TALE DNA-binding domain. The meganuclease domain can increase specificity and provide the cleavage. Similarly, inactivated or dead Cas9 (dCas9) can be fused to a cleavage domain and require the sgRNA/Cas9 target site and adjacent binding site for the fused DNA-binding domain. This likely would require some protein engineering of the dCas9, in addition to the catalytic inactivation, to decrease binding without the additional binding site.

Zinc Finger Nucleases

Zinc finger nucleases (ZFNs) are modular proteins comprised of an engineered zinc finger DNA binding domain linked to the catalytic domain of the type II endonuclease FokI. Because FokI functions only as a dimer, a pair of ZFNs must be engineered to bind to cognate target “half-site” sequences on opposite DNA strands and with precise spacing between them to enable the catalytically active FokI dimer to form. Upon dimerization of the FokI domain, which itself has no sequence specificity per se, a DNA double-strand break is generated between the ZFN half-sites as the initiating step in genome editing.

The DNA binding domain of each ZFN is typically comprised of 3-6 zinc fingers of the abundant Cys2-His2 architecture, with each finger primarily recognizing a triplet of nucleotides on one strand of the target DNA sequence, although cross-strand interaction with a fourth nucleotide also can be important. Alteration of the amino acids of a finger in positions that make key contacts with the DNA alters the sequence specificity of a given finger. Thus, a four-finger zinc finger protein will selectively recognize a 12 bp target sequence, where the target sequence is a composite of the triplet preferences contributed by each finger, although triplet preference can be influenced to varying degrees by neighboring fingers. An important aspect of ZFNs is that they can be readily re-targeted to almost any genomic address simply by modifying individual fingers, although considerable expertise is required to do this well. In most applications of ZFNs, proteins of 4-6 fingers are used, recognizing 12-18 bp respectively. Hence, a pair of ZFNs will typically recognize a combined target sequence of 24-36 bp, not including the typical 5-7 bp spacer between half-sites. The binding sites can be separated further with larger spacers, including 15-17 bp. A target sequence of this length is likely to be unique in the human genome, assuming repetitive sequences or gene homologs are excluded during the design process. Nevertheless, the ZFN protein-DNA interactions are not absolute in their specificity so off-target binding and cleavage events do occur, either as a heterodimer between the two ZFNs, or as a homodimer of one or the other of the ZFNs. The latter possibility has been effectively eliminated by engineering the dimerization interface of the FokI domain to create “plus” and “minus” variants, also known as obligate heterodimer variants, which can only dimerize with each other, and not with themselves. Forcing the obligate heterodimer prevents formation of the homodimer. This has greatly enhanced specificity of ZFNs, as well as any other nuclease that adopts these FokI variants.

A variety of ZFN-based systems have been described in the art, modifications thereof are regularly reported, and numerous references describe rules and parameters that are used to guide the design of ZFNs; see, e.g., Segal et al., Proc Natl Acad Sci USA 96(6):2758-63 (1999); Dreier B et al., J Mol Biol 303(4):489-502 (2000); Liu Q et al., J Biol Chem 277(6):3850-6 (2002); Dreier et al., J Biol Chem 280(42):35588-97 (2005); and Dreier et al., J Biol Chem 276(31):29466-78 (2001).

Transcription Activator-Like Effector Nucleases (TALENs)

Transcription Activator-Like Effector Nucleases (TALENs) represent another format of modular nucleases whereby, as with ZFNs, an engineered DNA binding domain is linked to the FokI nuclease domain, and a pair of TALENs operates in tandem to achieve targeted DNA cleavage. The major difference from ZFNs is the nature of the DNA binding domain and the associated target DNA sequence recognition properties. The TALEN DNA binding domain derives from TALE proteins, which were originally described in the plant bacterial pathogen Xanthomonas sp. TALEs are comprised of tandem arrays of 33-35 amino acid repeats, with each repeat recognizing a single base pair in the target DNA sequence that is typically up to 20 bp in length, giving a total target sequence length of up to 40 bp. Nucleotide specificity of each repeat is determined by the repeat variable diresidue (RVD), which includes just two amino acids at positions 12 and 13. The bases guanine, adenine, cytosine and thymine are predominantly recognized by the four RVDs: Asn-Asn, Asn-Ile, His-Asp and Asn-Gly, respectively. This constitutes a much simpler recognition code than for zinc fingers, and thus represents an advantage over the latter for nuclease design. Nevertheless, as with ZFNs, the protein-DNA interactions of TALENs are not absolute in their specificity, and TALENs have also benefitted from the use of obligate heterodimer variants of the FokI domain to reduce off-target activity.

Additional variants of the FokI domain have been created that are deactivated in their catalytic function. If one half of either a TALEN or a ZFN pair contains an inactive FokI domain, then only single-strand DNA cleavage (nicking) will occur at the target site, rather than a DSB. The outcome is comparable to the use of CRISPR/Cas9/Cpf1 “nickase” mutants in which one of the Cas9 cleavage domains has been deactivated. DNA nicks can be used to drive genome editing by HDR, but at lower efficiency than with a DSB. The main benefit is that off-target nicks are quickly and accurately repaired, unlike the DSB, which is prone to NHEJ-mediated mis-repair.

A variety of TALEN-based systems have been described in the art, and modifications thereof are regularly reported; see, e.g., Boch, Science 326(5959):1509-12 (2009); Mak et al., Science 335(6069):716-9 (2012); and Moscou et al., Science 326(5959):1501 (2009). The use of TALENs based on the “Golden Gate” platform, or cloning scheme, has been described by multiple groups; see, e.g., Cermak et al., Nucleic Acids Res. 39(12):e82 (2011); Li et al., Nucleic Acids Res. 39(14):6315-25(2011); Weber et al., PLoS One. 6(2): e16765 (2011); Wang et al., J Genet Genomics 41(6):339-47, Epub 2014 May 17 (2014); and Cermak T et al., Methods Mol Biol. 1239:133-59 (2015).

Homing Endonucleases

Homing endonucleases (HEs) are sequence-specific endonucleases that have long recognition sequences (14-44 base pairs) and cleave DNA with high specificity—often at sites unique in the genome. There are at least six known families of HEs as classified by their structure, including LAGLIDADG (SEQ ID NO: 5271), GIY-YIG, His-Cis box, H-N-H, PD-(D/E)xK, and Vsr-like that are derived from a broad range of hosts, including eukarya, protists, bacteria, archaea, cyanobacteria and phage. As with ZFNs and TALENs, HEs can be used to create a DSB at a target locus as the initial step in genome editing. In addition, some natural and engineered HEs cut only a single strand of DNA, thereby functioning as site-specific nickases. The large target sequence of HEs and the specificity that they offer have made them attractive candidates to create site-specific DSBs.

A variety of HE-based systems have been described in the art, and modifications thereof are regularly reported; see, e.g., the reviews by Steentoft et al., Glycobiology 24(8):663-80 (2014); Belfort and Bonocora, Methods Mol Biol. 1123:1-26 (2014); Hafez and Hausner, Genome 55(8):553-69 (2012).

MegaTAL/Tev-mTALEN/MegaTev

As further examples of hybrid nucleases, the MegaTAL platform and Tev-mTALEN platform use a fusion of TALE DNA binding domains and catalytically active HEs, taking advantage of both the tunable DNA binding and specificity of the TALE, as well as the cleavage sequence specificity of the HE; see, e.g., Boissel et al., NAR 42: 2591-2601 (2014); Kleinstiver et al., G3 4:1155-65 (2014); and Boissel and Scharenberg, Methods Mol. Biol. 1239: 171-96 (2015).

In a further variation, the MegaTev architecture is the fusion of a meganuclease (Mega) with the nuclease domain derived from the GIY-YIG homing endonuclease I-TevI (Tev). The two active sites are positioned ˜30 bp apart on a DNA substrate and generate two DSBs with non-compatible cohesive ends; see, e.g., Wolfs et al., NAR 42, 8816-29 (2014). It is anticipated that other combinations of existing nuclease-based approaches will evolve and be useful in achieving the targeted genome modifications described herein.

dCas9-FokI or dCpf1-FokI and Other Nucleases

Combining the structural and functional properties of the nuclease platforms described above offers a further approach to genome editing that can potentially overcome some of the inherent deficiencies. As an example, the CRISPR genome editing system typically uses a single Cas9 endonuclease to create a DSB. The specificity of targeting is driven by a 20 or 24 nucleotide sequence in the guide RNA that undergoes Watson-Crick base-pairing with the target DNA (plus an additional 2 bases in the adjacent NAG or NGG PAM sequence in the case of Cas9 from S. pyogenes). Such a sequence is long enough to be unique in the human genome, however, the specificity of the RNA/DNA interaction is not absolute, with significant promiscuity sometimes tolerated, particularly in the 5′ half of the target sequence, effectively reducing the number of bases that drive specificity. One solution to this has been to completely deactivate the Cas9 or Cpf1 catalytic function—retaining only the RNA-guided DNA binding function—and instead fusing a FokI domain to the deactivated Cas9; see, e.g., Tsai et al., Nature Biotech 32: 569-76 (2014); and Guilinger et al., Nature Biotech. 32: 577-82 (2014). Because FokI must dimerize to become catalytically active, two guide RNAs are required to tether two FokI fusions in close proximity to form the dimer and cleave DNA. This essentially doubles the number of bases in the combined target sites, thereby increasing the stringency of targeting by CRISPR-based systems.

As further example, fusion of the TALE DNA binding domain to a catalytically active HE, such as I-TevI, takes advantage of both the tunable DNA binding and specificity of the TALE, as well as the cleavage sequence specificity of I-TevI, with the expectation that off-target cleavage can be further reduced.

Methods, Compositions, Therapeutics, and Kits of the Invention

Accordingly, the present disclosure relates in particular to the following non-limiting inventions:

In a first method, Method 1, the present disclosure provides a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299, the method comprising: introducing into a human cell one or more DNA endonuclease, thereby effecting one or more SSBs or DSBs within or near one or more of: intron 12-13, exon 13, and intron 13-14 of the USH2A gene that results in a correction thereby creating an edited human cell.

In another method, Method 2, the present disclosure provides a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 as provided in Method 1, wherein the guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 is located in exon 13 of the USH2A gene.

In another method, Method 3, the present disclosure provides an in vivo method for treating a patient with one or more of Usher Syndrome Type 2A and ARRP, the method comprising: editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 in a cell of the patient.

In another method, Method 4, the present disclosure provides an in vivo method for treating a patient with one or more of Usher Syndrome Type 2A and ARRP, as provided in Method 3, wherein the editing comprises: introducing into the cell one or more DNA endonuclease, thereby effecting one or more SSBs or DSBs within or near one or more of: intron 12-13, exon 13, and intron 13-14 of the USH2A gene that results in a correction and results in restoration of usherin protein function.

In another method, Method 5, the present disclosure provides an in vivo method for treating a patient with one or more of Usher Syndrome Type 2A and ARRP, as provided in any one of Methods 3 or 4, wherein the guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 is located in exon 13 of the USH2A gene.

In another method, Method 6, the present disclosure provides a method, as provided in any one of Methods 1 or 4, wherein the one or more DNA endonuclease is a Cas1, Cas1B, Cas2, Cas3, Cas4, Cas5, Cas6, Cas7, Cas8, Cas9 (also known as Csn1 and Csx12), Cas100, Csy1, Csy2, Csy3, Cse1, Cse2, Csc1, Csc2, Csa5, Csn2, Csm2, Csm3, Csm4, Csm5, Csm6, Cmr1, Cmr3, Cmr4, Cmr5, Cmr6, Csb1, Csb2, Csb3, Csx17, Csx14, Csx10, Csx16, CsaX, Csx3, Csx1, Csx15, Csf1, Csf2, Csf3, Csf4, or Cpf1 endonuclease; a homolog thereof, a recombination of the naturally occurring molecule thereof, codon-optimized thereof, or modified versions thereof, and combinations thereof.

In another method, Method 7, the present disclosure provides an in vivo method for treating a patient with one or more of Usher Syndrome Type 2A and ARRP, as provided in Method 6, wherein the method comprises introducing into the cell one or more polynucleotides encoding the one or more DNA endonuclease.

In another method, Method 8, the present disclosure provides an in vivo method for treating a patient with one or more of Usher Syndrome Type 2A and ARRP, as provided in Method 6, wherein the method comprises introducing into the cell one or more RNAs encoding the one or more DNA endonuclease.

In another method, Method 9, the present disclosure provides an in vivo method for treating a patient with one or more of Usher Syndrome Type 2A and ARRP, as provided in any one of Methods 7 or 8, wherein the one or more polynucleotides or one or more RNAs is one or more modified polynucleotides or one or more modified RNAs.

In another method, Method 10, the present disclosure provides an in vivo method for treating a patient with one or more of Usher Syndrome Type 2A and ARRP, as provided in Method 6, wherein the DNA endonuclease is one or more proteins or polypeptides.

In another method, Method 11, the present disclosure provides a method, as provided in any one of Methods 1-10, wherein the method further comprises: introducing into the cell one or more gRNAs.

In another method, Method 12, the present disclosure provides an in vivo method for treating a patient with one or more of Usher Syndrome Type 2A and ARRP, as provided in Method 11, wherein the one or more gRNAs are sgRNAs.

In another method, Method 13, the present disclosure provides an in vivo method for treating a patient with one or more of Usher Syndrome Type 2A and ARRP, as provided in any one of Methods 11-12, wherein the one or more gRNAs or one or more sgRNAs is one or more modified gRNAs or one or more modified sgRNAs.

In another method, Method 14, the present disclosure provides an in vivo method for treating a patient with one or more of Usher Syndrome Type 2A and ARRP, as provided in any one of Methods 10-13, wherein the one or more DNA endonucleases is pre-complexed with one or more gRNAs or one or more sgRNAs.

In another method, Method 15, the present disclosure provides a method, as provided in any one of Methods 1, 2, or 4-14, wherein the restoration of usherin protein function is a result of exon 13 skipping during mRNA processing.

In another method, Method 16, the present disclosure provides an in vivo method for treating a patient with one or more of Usher Syndrome Type 2A and ARRP, as provided in any one of Methods 1-15, further comprising: introducing into the cell a polynucleotide donor template comprising at least a portion of the wild-type USH2A gene, or cDNA.

In another method, Method 17, the present disclosure provides an in vivo method for treating a patient with one or more of Usher Syndrome Type 2A and ARRP, as provided in Method 16, wherein the at least a portion of the wild-type USH2A gene or cDNA comprises exon 13, intronic regions, or combinations thereof.

In another method, Method 18, the present disclosure provides an in vivo method for treating a patient with one or more of Usher Syndrome Type 2A and ARRP, as provided in any one of Methods 16 or 17, wherein the polynucleotide donor template is either a single or double-stranded polynucleotide.

In another method, Method 19, the present disclosure provides an in vivo method for treating a patient with one or more of Usher Syndrome Type 2A and ARRP, as provided in any one of Methods 16 or 17, wherein the polynucleotide donor template has homologous arms to exon 13.

In another method, Method 20, the present disclosure provides a method, as provided in any one of Methods 1 or 4, further comprising: introducing into the cell one gRNA; wherein the one or more DNA endonuclease is one or more Cas9 or Cpf1 endonuclease that effect one SSB or DSB at a locus located within or near one or more of: the intron 12-13, the exon 13, and the intron 13-14 of the USH2A gene; and wherein the gRNA comprises a spacer sequence that is complementary to a segment of the locus located within or near one or more of: the intron 12-13, the exon 13, and the intron 13-14 of the USH2A gene.

In another method, Method 21, the present disclosure provides a method, as provided in any one of Methods 1 or 4, further comprising: introducing into the cell one or more gRNAs wherein the one or more DNA endonuclease is one or more Cas9 or Cpf1 endonuclease that effect a pair of SSBs or DSBs, the first at a 5′ locus within or near the intron 12-13 or the exon 13 of the USH2A gene and the second at a 3′ locus, within or near the exon 13 or the intron 13-14 of the USH2A gene; and wherein the first guide RNA comprises a spacer sequence that is complementary to a segment of the 5′ locus and the second guide RNA comprises a spacer sequence that is complementary to a segment of the 3′ locus.

In another method, Method 22, the present disclosure provides an in vivo method for treating a patient with one or more of Usher Syndrome Type 2A and ARRP, as provided in any one of Methods 20 or 21, wherein the guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 is located in exon 13 of the USH2A gene.

In another method, Method 23, the present disclosure provides an in vivo method for treating a patient with one or more of Usher Syndrome Type 2A and ARRP, as provided in any one of Methods 20-22, wherein the one or more gRNAs are one or more sgRNAs.

In another method, Method 24, the present disclosure provides an in vivo method for treating a patient with one or more of Usher Syndrome Type 2A and ARRP, as provided in any one of Methods 20-23, wherein the one or more gRNAs or one or more sgRNAs is one or more modified gRNAs or one or more modified sgRNAs.

In another method, Method 25, the present disclosure provides an in vivo method for treating a patient with one or more of Usher Syndrome Type 2A and ARRP, as provided in any one of Methods 20-24, wherein the one or more DNA endonuclease is pre-complexed with one or more gRNAs or one or more sgRNAs.

In another method, Method 26, the present disclosure provides an in vivo method for treating a patient with one or more of Usher Syndrome Type 2A and ARRP, as provided in Method 20, further comprising: a polynucleotide donor template comprising at least a portion of the wild-type USH2A gene; wherein a new sequence from the polynucleotide donor template is inserted into the chromosomal DNA at the locus that results in a correction of the guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 of the USH2A gene.

In another method, Method 27, the present disclosure provides an in vivo method for treating a patient with one or more of Usher Syndrome Type 2A and ARRP, as provided in Methods 21, further comprising: a polynucleotide donor template comprising at least a portion of the wild-type USH2A gene; wherein a new sequence from the polynucleotide donor template is inserted into the chromosomal DNA between the 5′ locus and the 3′ locus that results in a correction of a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 in the chromosomal DNA between the 5′ locus and the 3′ locus.

In another method, Method 28, the present disclosure provides an in vivo method for treating a patient with one or more of Usher Syndrome Type 2A and ARRP, as provided in any one of Methods 26-27, wherein the at least a portion of the wild-type USH2A gene or cDNA comprises exon 13, intronic regions, or combinations thereof.

In another method, Method 29, the present disclosure provides an in vivo method for treating a patient with one or more of Usher Syndrome Type 2A and ARRP, as provided in any one of Methods 26-27, wherein the polynucleotide donor template is either a single or double-stranded polynucleotide.

In another method, Method 30, the present disclosure provides an in vivo method for treating a patient with one or more of Usher Syndrome Type 2A and ARRP, as provided in any one of Methods 26-27, wherein the polynucleotide donor template has homologous arms to exon 13.

In another method, Method 31, the present disclosure provides an in vivo method for treating a patient with one or more of Usher Syndrome Type 2A and ARRP, as provided in any one of Methods 20-30, wherein the SSBs or DSBs are within or near the intron 12-13 and the intron 13-14 of the USH2A gene.

In another method, Method 32, the present disclosure provides an in vivo method for treating a patient with one or more of Usher Syndrome Type 2A and ARRP, as provided in any one of Methods 20-30, wherein the SSBs or DSBs are within or near the intron 12-13 and the exon 13 of the USH2A gene.

In another method, Method 33, the present disclosure provides an in vivo method for treating a patient with one or more of Usher Syndrome Type 2A and ARRP, as provided in any one of Methods 11-14 or 23-25, wherein the gRNA or sgRNA is complementary to a segment within or near the intron 12-13, the exon 13, or the intron 13-14 of the USH2A gene.

In another method, Method 34, the present disclosure provides a method, as provided in any one of Methods 1, 2, or 4-33, wherein the correction is by homology directed repair (HDR).

In another method, Method 35, the present disclosure provides a method, as provided in any one of Methods 1 or 4, further comprising: introducing into the cell two gRNAs; wherein the one or more DNA endonuclease is one or more Cas9 or Cpf1 endonuclease that effect a pair of DSBs, the first at a 5′ DSB locus within or near the intron 12-13 or the exon 13 of the USH2A gene and the second at a 3′ DSB locus within or near the exon 13 or the intron 13-14 of the USH2A gene that causes a deletion of the chromosomal DNA between the 5′ DSB locus and the 3′ DSB locus that results in a deletion of the chromosomal DNA between the 5′ DSB locus and the 3′ DSB locus; and wherein the first gRNA comprises a spacer sequence that is complementary to a segment of the 5′ DSB locus and the second gRNA comprises a spacer sequence that is complementary to a segment of the 3′ DSB locus.

In another method, Method 36, the present disclosure provides an in vivo method for treating a patient with one or more of Usher Syndrome Type 2A and ARRP, as provided in Method 35, wherein the two gRNAs are two sgRNAs.

In another method, Method 37, the present disclosure provides an in vivo method for treating a patient with one or more of Usher Syndrome Type 2A and ARRP, as provided in any one of Methods 35-36, wherein the two gRNAs or two sgRNAs are two modified gRNAs or two modified sgRNAs.

In another method, Method 38, the present disclosure provides an in vivo method for treating a patient with one or more of Usher Syndrome Type 2A and ARRP, as provided in any one of Methods 35-37, wherein the one or more DNA endonuclease is pre-complexed with two gRNAs or two sgRNAs.

In another method, Method 39, the present disclosure provides an in vivo method for treating a patient with one or more of Usher Syndrome Type 2A and ARRP, as provided in any one of Methods 35-38, wherein the 5′ DSB is within or near the intron 12-13 of the USH2A gene and the 3′ DSB is within or near the intron 13-14 of the USH2A gene.

In another method, Method 40, the present disclosure provides an in vivo method for treating a patient with one or more of Usher Syndrome Type 2A and ARRP, as provided in any one of Methods 35-38, wherein the 5′ DSB is within or near the intron 12-13 of the USH2A gene and the 3′ DSB is within or near the exon 13 of the USH2A gene.

In another method, Method 41, the present disclosure provides an in vivo method for treating a patient with one or more of Usher Syndrome Type 2A and ARRP, as provided in any one of Methods 35-40, wherein the deletion is a deletion of 150 bp to 7500 bp.

In another method, Method 42, the present disclosure provides an in vivo method for treating a patient with one or more of Usher Syndrome Type 2A and ARRP, as provided in any one of Methods 35-40, wherein the deletion is a deletion of 200 bp to 850 bp.

In another method, Method 43, the present disclosure provides an in vivo method for treating a patient with one or more of Usher Syndrome Type 2A and ARRP, as provided in any one of Methods 35-42, further comprising: a polynucleotide donor template comprising at least a portion of the wild-type USH2A gene.

In another method, Method 44, the present disclosure provides an in vivo method for treating a patient with one or more of Usher Syndrome Type 2A and ARRP, as provided in Method 43, wherein the at least a portion of the wild-type USH2A gene or cDNA comprises exon 13, intronic regions, or combinations thereof.

In another method, Method 45, the present disclosure provides an in vivo method for treating a patient with one or more of Usher Syndrome Type 2A and ARRP, as provided in Method 43, wherein the polynucleotide donor template comprises exon 13 of the USH2A gene and is up to 5 kb.

In another method, Method 46, the present disclosure provides an in vivo method for treating a patient with one or more of Usher Syndrome Type 2A and ARRP, as provided in Method 45, wherein the polynucleotide donor template is delivered by AAV.

In another method, Method 47, the present disclosure provides an in vivo method for treating a patient with one or more of Usher Syndrome Type 2A and ARRP, as provided in any one of Methods 20-21, or 35, wherein the Cas9 or Cpf1 mRNA, gRNA, and polynucleotide donor template are either each formulated into separate lipid nanoparticles or all co-formulated into a lipid nanoparticle.

In another method, Method 48, the present disclosure provides an in vivo method for treating a patient with one or more of Usher Syndrome Type 2A and ARRP, as provided in any one of Methods 20-21, or 35, wherein the Cas9 or Cpf1 mRNA, gRNA, and polynucleotide donor template are either each formulated into separate adeno-associated virus (AAV) vectors or all co-formulated into an AAV vector.

In another method, Method 49, the present disclosure provides an in vivo method for treating a patient with one or more of Usher Syndrome Type 2A and ARRP, as provided in any one of Methods 20-21, or 35, wherein the Cas9 or Cpf1 mRNA is formulated into a lipid nanoparticle, and both the gRNA and polynucleotide donor template are delivered to the cell by an AAV vector.

In another method, Method 50, the present disclosure provides an in vivo method for treating a patient with one or more of Usher Syndrome Type 2A and ARRP, as provided in any one of Methods 20-21, or 35, wherein the Cas9 or Cpf1 mRNA is formulated into a lipid nanoparticle, and the gRNA is delivered to the cell by electroporation and polynucleotide donor template is delivered to the cell by an AAV vector.

In another method, Method 51, the present disclosure provides an in vivo method for treating a patient with one or more of Usher Syndrome Type 2A and ARRP, as provided in any one of Methods 48-50, wherein the AAV vector is a self-inactivating AAV vector.

In another method, Method 52, the present disclosure provides a method, as provided in any one of Methods 1-51, wherein the USH2A gene is located on Chromosome 1: 215,622,893-216,423,395 (Genome Reference Consortium—GRCh38/hg38).

In another method, Method 53, the present disclosure provides a method, as provided in any one of Methods 1, 2, or 4-52, wherein the restoration of usherin protein function is compared to wild-type or normal usherin protein function.

In another method, Method 54, the present disclosure provides a method, as provided in any one of Methods 1 or 2, wherein the human cell is a photoreceptor cell or retinal progenitor cell.

In another method, Method 55, the present disclosure provides an in vivo method for treating a patient with one or more of Usher Syndrome Type 2A and ARRP, as provided in any one of Methods 3-53, wherein the cell is a photoreceptor cell or retinal progenitor cell.

In another method, Method 56, the present disclosure provides a method, as provided in Method 1, wherein the correction results in a modulation of expression or function of the USH2A gene.

In another method, Method 57, the present disclosure provides a method, as provided in Method 3, wherein the editing comprises: introducing into the cell one or more DNA endonuclease, thereby effecting one or more SSBs or DSBs within or near one or more of: intron 12-13, exon 13, and intron 13-14 of the USH2A gene that results in a modulation of expression or function of the USH2A gene and results in restoration of usherin protein function.

In another method, Method 58, the present disclosure provides a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299, the method comprising: introducing into a human cell one or more DNA endonuclease, thereby effecting one or more SSBs or DSBs within or near one or more of: intron 12-13, exon 13, and intron 13-14 of the USH2A gene that results in a modulation of expression or function of the USH2A gene thereby creating an edited human cell.

In another method, Method 59, the present disclosure provides a method, as provided in Method 58, wherein the guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 is located in exon 13 of the USH2A gene.

In another method, Method 60, the present disclosure provides a method, as provided in any one of Methods 1 or 4, further comprising: introducing into the cell one or more gRNAs wherein the one or more DNA endonuclease is one or more Cas9 or Cpf1 endonuclease that effect a pair of SSBs or DSBs, the first at a 5′ locus within or near the intron 12-13 of the USH2A gene and the second at a 3′ locus, within or near the intron 13-14 of the USH2A gene; and wherein the first guide RNA comprises a spacer sequence that is complementary to a segment of the 5′ locus and the second guide RNA comprises a spacer sequence that is complementary to a segment of the 3′ locus.

In another method, Method 61, the present disclosure provides a method, as provided in any one of Methods 1 or 4, further comprising: introducing into the cell one or more gRNAs wherein the one or more DNA endonuclease is one or more Cas9 or Cpf1 endonuclease that effect a pair of SSBs or DSBs, the first at a 5′ locus within or near the intron 12-13 of the USH2A gene and the second at a 3′ locus, within or near the exon 13 of the USH2A gene; and wherein the first guide RNA comprises a spacer sequence that is complementary to a segment of the 5′ locus and the second guide RNA comprises a spacer sequence that is complementary to a segment of the 3′ locus.

In another method, Method 62, the present disclosure provides a method, as provided in any one of Methods 1 or 4, further comprising: introducing into the cell one or more gRNAs wherein the one or more DNA endonuclease is one or more Cas9 or Cpf1 endonuclease that effect a pair of SSBs or DSBs, the first at a 5′ locus within or near the exon 13 of the USH2A gene and the second at a 3′ locus, within or near the intron 13-14 of the USH2A gene; and wherein the first guide RNA comprises a spacer sequence that is complementary to a segment of the 5′ locus and the second guide RNA comprises a spacer sequence that is complementary to a segment of the 3′ locus.

In another method, Method 63, the present disclosure provides a method, as provided in any one of Methods 1 or 4, further comprising: introducing into the cell two guide ribonucleic acid (gRNAs); wherein the one or more DNA endonuclease is one or more Cas9 or Cpf1 endonuclease that effect a pair of DSBs, the first at a 5′ DSB locus within or near the intron 12-13 of the USH2A gene and the second at a 3′ DSB locus within or near the intron 13-14 of the USH2A gene that causes a deletion of the chromosomal DNA between the 5′ DSB locus and the 3′ DSB locus that results in a deletion of the chromosomal DNA between the 5′ DSB locus and the 3′ DSB locus; and wherein the first guide RNA comprises a spacer sequence that is complementary to a segment of the 5′ DSB locus and the second guide RNA comprises a spacer sequence that is complementary to a segment of the 3′ DSB locus.

In another method, Method 64, the present disclosure provides a method, as provided in any one of Methods 1 or 4, further comprising: introducing into the cell two guide ribonucleic acid (gRNAs); wherein the one or more DNA endonuclease is one or more Cas9 or Cpf1 endonuclease that effect a pair of DSBs, the first at a 5′ DSB locus within or near the intron 12-13 of the USH2A gene and the second at a 3′ DSB locus within or near the exon 13 of the USH2A gene that causes a deletion of the chromosomal DNA between the 5′ DSB locus and the 3′ DSB locus that results in a deletion of the chromosomal DNA between the 5′ DSB locus and the 3′ DSB locus; and wherein the first guide RNA comprises a spacer sequence that is complementary to a segment of the 5′ DSB locus and the second guide RNA comprises a spacer sequence that is complementary to a segment of the 3′ DSB locus.

In another method, Method 65, the present disclosure provides a method, as provided in any one of Methods 1 or 4, further comprising: introducing into the cell two guide ribonucleic acid (gRNAs); wherein the one or more DNA endonuclease is one or more Cas9 or Cpf1 endonuclease that effect a pair of DSBs, the first at a 5′ DSB locus within or near the exon 13 of the USH2A gene and the second at a 3′ DSB locus within or near the intron 13-14 of the USH2A gene that causes a deletion of the chromosomal DNA between the 5′ DSB locus and the 3′ DSB locus that results in a deletion of the chromosomal DNA between the 5′ DSB locus and the 3′ DSB locus; and wherein the first guide RNA comprises a spacer sequence that is complementary to a segment of the 5′ DSB locus and the second guide RNA comprises a spacer sequence that is complementary to a segment of the 3′ DSB locus.

In another method, Method 66, the present disclosure provides a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 as provided in Method 1, wherein the human cell has defective activity and the edited human cell expresses a functional usherin.

In another method, Method 67, the present disclosure provides a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299, the method comprising: deleting a sequence comprising the guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 of the USH2A gene in a cell using a first gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5295 and a second gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5313.

In another method, Method 68, the present disclosure provides a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 as provided in Method 67 wherein the deleting results in a deletion of 827 bp.

In another method, Method 69, the present disclosure provides a method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299, the method comprising: administering a first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA to the patient, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5295 and the second gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5313.

In another method, Method 70, the present disclosure provides a method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 as provided in Method 69, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA are administered simultaneously; the first gRNA or sgRNA is administered prior to the second gRNA or sgRNA; or the second gRNA or sgRNA is administered prior to the first gRNA or sgRNA.

In another method, Method 71, the present disclosure provides a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299, the method comprising: deleting a sequence comprising the guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 of the USH2A gene in a cell using a first gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5295 and a second gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5314.

In another method, Method 72, the present disclosure provides a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 as provided in Method 71, wherein the deleting results in a deletion of 847 bp.

In another method, Method 73, the present disclosure provides a method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299, the method comprising: administering a first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA to the patient, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5295 and the second gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5314.

In another method, Method 74, the present disclosure provides a method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 as provided in Method 73, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA are administered simultaneously; the first gRNA or sgRNA is administered prior to the second gRNA or sgRNA; or the second gRNA or sgRNA is administered prior to the first gRNA or sgRNA.

In another method, Method 75, the present disclosure provides a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299, the method comprising: deleting a sequence comprising the guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 of the USH2A gene in a cell using a first gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5299 and a second gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5313.

In another method, Method 76, the present disclosure provides a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 as provided in Method 75, wherein the deleting results in a deletion of 825 bp.

In another method, Method 77, the present disclosure provides a method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299, the method comprising: administering a first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA to the patient, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5299 and the second gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5313.

In another method, Method 78, the present disclosure provides a method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 as provided in Method 77, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA are administered simultaneously; the first gRNA or sgRNA is administered prior to the second gRNA or sgRNA; or the second gRNA or sgRNA is administered prior to the first gRNA or sgRNA.

In another method, Method 79, the present disclosure provides a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299, the method comprising: deleting a sequence comprising the guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 of the USH2A gene in a cell using a first gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5299 and a second gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5314.

In another method, Method 80, the present disclosure provides a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 as provided in Method 79, wherein the deleting results in a deletion of 845 bp.

In another method, Method 81, the present disclosure provides a method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299, the method comprising: administering a first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA to the patient, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5299 and the second gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5314.

In another method, Method 82, the present disclosure provides a method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 as provided in Method 81, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA are administered simultaneously; the first gRNA or sgRNA is administered prior to the second gRNA or sgRNA; or the second gRNA or sgRNA is administered prior to the first gRNA or sgRNA.

In another method, Method 83, the present disclosure provides a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299, the method comprising: deleting a sequence comprising the guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 of the USH2A gene in a cell using a first gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5295 and a second gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5276.

In another method, Method 84, the present disclosure provides a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 as provided in Method 83, wherein the deleting results in a deletion of 251 bp.

In another method, Method 85, the present disclosure provides a method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299, the method comprising: administering a first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA to the patient, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5295 and the second gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5276.

In another method, Method 86, the present disclosure provides a method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 as provided in Method 85, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA are administered simultaneously; the first gRNA or sgRNA is administered prior to the second gRNA or sgRNA; or the second gRNA or sgRNA is administered prior to the first gRNA or sgRNA.

In another method, Method 87, the present disclosure provides a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299, the method comprising: deleting a sequence comprising the guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 of the USH2A gene in a cell using a first gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5295 and a second gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5275.

In another method, Method 88, the present disclosure provides a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 as provided in Method 87, wherein the deleting results in a deletion of 250 bp.

In another method, Method 89, the present disclosure provides a method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299, the method comprising: administering a first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA to the patient, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5295 and the second gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5275.

In another method, Method 90, the present disclosure provides a method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 as provided in Method 89, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA are administered simultaneously; the first gRNA or sgRNA is administered prior to the second gRNA or sgRNA; or the second gRNA or sgRNA is administered prior to the first gRNA or sgRNA.

In another method, Method 91, the present disclosure provides a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299, the method comprising: deleting a sequence comprising the guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 of the USH2A gene in a cell using a first gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5295 and a second gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5277.

In another method, Method 92, the present disclosure provides a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 as provided in Method 91, wherein the deleting results in a deletion of 285 bp.

In another method, Method 93, the present disclosure provides a method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299, the method comprising: administering a first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA to the patient, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5295 and the second gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5277.

In another method, Method 94, the present disclosure provides a method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 as provided in Method 93, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA are administered simultaneously; the first gRNA or sgRNA is administered prior to the second gRNA or sgRNA; or the second gRNA or sgRNA is administered prior to the first gRNA or sgRNA.

In another method, Method 95, the present disclosure provides a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299, the method comprising: deleting a sequence comprising the guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 of the USH2A gene in a cell using a first gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5295 and a second gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5278.

In another method, Method 96, the present disclosure provides a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 as provided in Method 95, wherein the deleting results in a deletion of 339 bp.

In another method, Method 97, the present disclosure provides a method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299, the method comprising: administering a first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA to the patient, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5295 and the second gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5278.

In another method, Method 98, the present disclosure provides a method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 as provided in Method 97, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA are administered simultaneously; the first gRNA or sgRNA is administered prior to the second gRNA or sgRNA; or the second gRNA or sgRNA is administered prior to the first gRNA or sgRNA.

In another method, Method 99, the present disclosure provides a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299, the method comprising: deleting a sequence comprising the guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 of the USH2A gene in a cell using a first gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5295 and a second gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5287.

In another method, Method 100, the present disclosure provides a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 as provided in Method 99, wherein the deleting results in a deletion of 398 bp.

In another method, Method 101, the present disclosure provides a method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299, the method comprising: administering a first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA to the patient, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5295 and the second gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5287.

In another method, Method 102, the present disclosure provides a method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 as provided in Method 101, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA are administered simultaneously; the first gRNA or sgRNA is administered prior to the second gRNA or sgRNA; or the second gRNA or sgRNA is administered prior to the first gRNA or sgRNA.

In another method, Method 103, the present disclosure provides a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299, the method comprising: deleting a sequence comprising the guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 of the USH2A gene in a cell using a first gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5295 and a second gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5286.

In another method, Method 104, the present disclosure provides a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 as provided in Method 103, wherein the deleting results in a deletion of 397 bp.

In another method, Method 105, the present disclosure provides a method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299, the method comprising: administering a first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA to the patient, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5295 and the second gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5286.

In another method, Method 106, the present disclosure provides a method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 as provided in Method 105, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA are administered simultaneously; the first gRNA or sgRNA is administered prior to the second gRNA or sgRNA; or the second gRNA or sgRNA is administered prior to the first gRNA or sgRNA.

In another method, Method 107, the present disclosure provides a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299, the method comprising: deleting a sequence comprising the guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 of the USH2A gene in a cell using a first gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5295 and a second gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5290.

In another method, Method 108, the present disclosure provides a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 as provided in Method 107, wherein the deleting results in a deletion of 450 bp.

In another method, Method 109, the present disclosure provides a method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299, the method comprising: administering a first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA to the patient, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5295 and the second gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5290.

In another method, Method 110, the present disclosure provides a method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 as provided in Method 109, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA are administered simultaneously; the first gRNA or sgRNA is administered prior to the second gRNA or sgRNA; or the second gRNA or sgRNA is administered prior to the first gRNA or sgRNA.

In another method, Method 111, the present disclosure provides a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299, the method comprising: deleting a sequence comprising the guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 of the USH2A gene in a cell using a first gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5295 and a second gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5291.

In another method, Method 112, the present disclosure provides a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 as provided in Method 111, wherein the deleting results in a deletion of 470 bp.

In another method, Method 113, the present disclosure provides a method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299, the method comprising: administering a first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA to the patient, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5295 and the second gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5291.

In another method, Method 114, the present disclosure provides a method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 as provided in Method 113, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA are administered simultaneously; the first gRNA or sgRNA is administered prior to the second gRNA or sgRNA; or the second gRNA or sgRNA is administered prior to the first gRNA or sgRNA.

In another method, Method 115, the present disclosure provides a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299, the method comprising: deleting a sequence comprising the guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 of the USH2A gene in a cell using a first gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5295 and a second gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5292.

In another method, Method 116, the present disclosure provides a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 as provided in Method 115, wherein the deleting results in a deletion of 506 bp.

In another method, Method 117, the present disclosure provides a method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299, the method comprising: administering a first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA to the patient, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5295 and the second gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5292.

In another method, Method 118, the present disclosure provides a method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 as provided in Method 117, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA are administered simultaneously; the first gRNA or sgRNA is administered prior to the second gRNA or sgRNA; or the second gRNA or sgRNA is administered prior to the first gRNA or sgRNA.

In another method, Method 119, the present disclosure provides a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299, the method comprising: deleting a sequence comprising the guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 of the USH2A gene in a cell using a first gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5295 and a second gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5294.

In another method, Method 120, the present disclosure provides a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 as provided in Method 119, wherein the deleting results in a deletion of 529 bp.

In another method, Method 121, the present disclosure provides a method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299, the method comprising: administering a first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA to the patient, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5295 and the second gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5294.

In another method, Method 122, the present disclosure provides a method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 as provided in Method 121, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA are administered simultaneously; the first gRNA or sgRNA is administered prior to the second gRNA or sgRNA; or the second gRNA or sgRNA is administered prior to the first gRNA or sgRNA.

In another method, Method 123, the present disclosure provides a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299, the method comprising: deleting a sequence comprising the guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 of the USH2A gene in a cell using a first gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5295 and a second gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5296.

In another method, Method 124, the present disclosure provides a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 as provided in Method 69, wherein the deleting results in a deletion of 617 bp.

In another method, Method 125, the present disclosure provides a method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299, the method comprising: administering a first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA to the patient, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5295 and the second gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5296.

In another method, Method 126, the present disclosure provides a method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 as provided in Method 125, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA are administered simultaneously; the first gRNA or sgRNA is administered prior to the second gRNA or sgRNA; or the second gRNA or sgRNA is administered prior to the first gRNA or sgRNA.

In another method, Method 127, the present disclosure provides a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299, the method comprising: deleting a sequence comprising the guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 of the USH2A gene in a cell using a first gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5295 and a second gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5302.

In another method, Method 128, the present disclosure provides a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 as provided in Method 127, wherein the deleting results in a deletion of 675 bp.

In another method, Method 129, the present disclosure provides a method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299, the method comprising: administering a first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA to the patient, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5295 and the second gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5302.

In another method, Method 130, the present disclosure provides a method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 as provided in Method 129, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA are administered simultaneously; the first gRNA or sgRNA is administered prior to the second gRNA or sgRNA; or the second gRNA or sgRNA is administered prior to the first gRNA or sgRNA.

In another method, Method 131, the present disclosure provides a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299, the method comprising: deleting a sequence comprising the guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 of the USH2A gene in a cell using a first gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5295 and a second gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5310.

In another method, Method 132, the present disclosure provides a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 as provided in Method 131, wherein the deleting results in a deletion of 730 bp.

In another method, Method 133, the present disclosure provides a method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299, the method comprising: administering a first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA to the patient, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5295 and the second gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5310.

In another method, Method 134, the present disclosure provides a method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 as provided in Method 133, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA are administered simultaneously; the first gRNA or sgRNA is administered prior to the second gRNA or sgRNA; or the second gRNA or sgRNA is administered prior to the first gRNA or sgRNA.

In another method, Method 135, the present disclosure provides a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299, the method comprising: deleting a sequence comprising the guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 of the USH2A gene in a cell using a first gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5299 and a second gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5276.

In another method, Method 136, the present disclosure provides a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 as provided in Method 135, wherein the deleting results in a deletion of 249 bp.

In another method, Method 137, the present disclosure provides a method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299, the method comprising: administering a first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA to the patient, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5299 and the second gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5276.

In another method, Method 138, the present disclosure provides a method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 as provided in Method 137, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA are administered simultaneously; the first gRNA or sgRNA is administered prior to the second gRNA or sgRNA; or the second gRNA or sgRNA is administered prior to the first gRNA or sgRNA.

In another method, Method 139, the present disclosure provides a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299, the method comprising: deleting a sequence comprising the guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 of the USH2A gene in a cell using a first gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5299 and a second gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5275.

In another method, Method 140, the present disclosure provides a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 as provided in Method 139, wherein the deleting results in a deletion of 248 bp.

In another method, Method 141, the present disclosure provides a method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299, the method comprising: administering a first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA to the patient, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5299 and the second gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5275.

In another method, Method 142, the present disclosure provides a method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 as provided in Method 141, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA are administered simultaneously; the first gRNA or sgRNA is administered prior to the second gRNA or sgRNA; or the second gRNA or sgRNA is administered prior to the first gRNA or sgRNA.

In another method, Method 143, the present disclosure provides a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299, the method comprising: deleting a sequence comprising the guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 of the USH2A gene in a cell using a first gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5299 and a second gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5277.

In another method, Method 144, the present disclosure provides a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 as provided in Method 143, wherein the deleting results in a deletion of 283 bp.

In another method, Method 145, the present disclosure provides a method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299, the method comprising: administering a first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA to the patient, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5299 and the second gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5277.

In another method, Method 146, the present disclosure provides a method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 as provided in Method 145, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA are administered simultaneously; the first gRNA or sgRNA is administered prior to the second gRNA or sgRNA; or the second gRNA or sgRNA is administered prior to the first gRNA or sgRNA.

In another method, Method 147, the present disclosure provides a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299, the method comprising: deleting a sequence comprising the guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 of the USH2A gene in a cell using a first gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5299 and a second gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5278.

In another method, Method 148, the present disclosure provides a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 as provided in Method 147, wherein the deleting results in a deletion of 337 bp.

In another method, Method 149, the present disclosure provides a method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299, the method comprising: administering a first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA to the patient, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5299 and the second gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5278.

In another method, Method 150, the present disclosure provides a method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 as provided in Method 149, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA are administered simultaneously; the first gRNA or sgRNA is administered prior to the second gRNA or sgRNA; or the second gRNA or sgRNA is administered prior to the first gRNA or sgRNA.

In another method, Method 151, the present disclosure provides a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299, the method comprising: deleting a sequence comprising the guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 of the USH2A gene in a cell using a first gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5299 and a second gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5287.

In another method, Method 152, the present disclosure provides a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 as provided in Method 151, wherein the deleting results in a deletion of 396 bp.

In another method, Method 153, the present disclosure provides a method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299, the method comprising: administering a first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA to the patient, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5299 and the second gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5287.

In another method, Method 154, the present disclosure provides a method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 as provided in Method 153, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA are administered simultaneously; the first gRNA or sgRNA is administered prior to the second gRNA or sgRNA; or the second gRNA or sgRNA is administered prior to the first gRNA or sgRNA.

In another method, Method 155, the present disclosure provides a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299, the method comprising: deleting a sequence comprising the guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 of the USH2A gene in a cell using a first gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5299 and a second gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5286.

In another method, Method 156, the present disclosure provides a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 as provided in Method 155, wherein the deleting results in a deletion of 395 bp.

In another method, Method 157, the present disclosure provides a method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299, the method comprising: administering a first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA to the patient, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5299 and the second gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5286.

In another method, Method 158, the present disclosure provides a method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 as provided in Method 157, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA are administered simultaneously; the first gRNA or sgRNA is administered prior to the second gRNA or sgRNA; or the second gRNA or sgRNA is administered prior to the first gRNA or sgRNA.

In another method, Method 159, the present disclosure provides a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299, the method comprising: deleting a sequence comprising the guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 of the USH2A gene in a cell using a first gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5299 and a second gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5290.

In another method, Method 160, the present disclosure provides a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 as provided in Method 159, wherein the deleting results in a deletion of 448 bp.

In another method, Method 161, the present disclosure provides a method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299, the method comprising: administering a first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA to the patient, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5299 and the second gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5290.

In another method, Method 162, the present disclosure provides a method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 as provided in Method 161, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA are administered simultaneously; the first gRNA or sgRNA is administered prior to the second gRNA or sgRNA; or the second gRNA or sgRNA is administered prior to the first gRNA or sgRNA.

In another method, Method 163, the present disclosure provides a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299, the method comprising: deleting a sequence comprising the guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 of the USH2A gene in a cell using a first gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5299 and a second gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5291.

In another method, Method 164, the present disclosure provides a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 as provided in Method 163, wherein the deleting results in a deletion of 468 bp.

In another method, Method 165, the present disclosure provides a method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299, the method comprising: administering a first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA to the patient, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5299 and the second gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5291.

In another method, Method 166, the present disclosure provides a method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 as provided in Method 165, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA are administered simultaneously; the first gRNA or sgRNA is administered prior to the second gRNA or sgRNA; or the second gRNA or sgRNA is administered prior to the first gRNA or sgRNA.

In another method, Method 167, the present disclosure provides a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299, the method comprising: deleting a sequence comprising the guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 of the USH2A gene in a cell using a first gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5299 and a second gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5292.

In another method, Method 168, the present disclosure provides a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 as provided in Method 167, wherein the deleting results in a deletion of 504 bp.

In another method, Method 169, the present disclosure provides a method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299, the method comprising: administering a first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA to the patient, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5299 and the second gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5292.

In another method, Method 170, the present disclosure provides a method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 as provided in Method 169, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA are administered simultaneously; the first gRNA or sgRNA is administered prior to the second gRNA or sgRNA; or the second gRNA or sgRNA is administered prior to the first gRNA or sgRNA.

In another method, Method 171, the present disclosure provides a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299, the method comprising: deleting a sequence comprising the guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 of the USH2A gene in a cell using a first gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5299 and a second gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5294.

In another method, Method 172, the present disclosure provides a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 as provided in Method 171, wherein the deleting results in a deletion of 527 bp.

In another method, Method 173, the present disclosure provides a method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299, the method comprising: administering a first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA to the patient, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5299 and the second gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5294.

In another method, Method 174, the present disclosure provides a method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 as provided in Method 173, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA are administered simultaneously; the first gRNA or sgRNA is administered prior to the second gRNA or sgRNA; or the second gRNA or sgRNA is administered prior to the first gRNA or sgRNA.

In another method, Method 175, the present disclosure provides a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299, the method comprising: deleting a sequence comprising the guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 of the USH2A gene in a cell using a first gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5299 and a second gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5296.

In another method, Method 176, the present disclosure provides a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 as provided in Method 175, wherein the deleting results in a deletion of 615 bp.

In another method, Method 177, the present disclosure provides method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299, the method comprising: administering a first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA to the patient, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5299 and the second gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5296.

In another method, Method 178, the present disclosure provides a method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 as provided in Method 177, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA are administered simultaneously; the first gRNA or sgRNA is administered prior to the second gRNA or sgRNA; or the second gRNA or sgRNA is administered prior to the first gRNA or sgRNA.

In another method, Method 179, the present disclosure provides a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299, the method comprising: deleting a sequence comprising the guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 of the USH2A gene in a cell using a first gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5299 and a second gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5302.

In another method, Method 180, the present disclosure provides a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 as provided in Method 179, wherein the deleting results in a deletion of 673 bp.

In another method, Method 181, the present disclosure provides a method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299, the method comprising: administering a first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA to the patient, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5299 and the second gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5302.

In another method, Method 182, the present disclosure provides a method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 as provided in Method 181, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA are administered simultaneously; the first gRNA or sgRNA is administered prior to the second gRNA or sgRNA; or the second gRNA or sgRNA is administered prior to the first gRNA or sgRNA.

In another method, Method 183, the present disclosure provides a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299, the method comprising: deleting a sequence comprising the guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 of the USH2A gene in a cell using a first gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5299 and a second gRNA or sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5310.

In another method, Method 184, the present disclosure provides a method for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 as provided in Method 183, wherein the deleting results in a deletion of 728 bp.

In another method, Method 185, the present disclosure provides a method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299, the method comprising: administering a first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA to the patient, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5299 and the second gRNA or sgRNA comprises SEQ ID NO: 5310.

In another method, Method 186, the present disclosure provides a method for treating a patient with an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 as provided in Method 185, wherein the first gRNA or sgRNA and second gRNA or sgRNA are administered simultaneously; the first gRNA or sgRNA is administered prior to the second gRNA or sgRNA; or the second gRNA or sgRNA is administered prior to the first gRNA or sgRNA.

In a first composition, Composition 1, the present disclosure provides one or more gRNAs for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 in a cell from a patient with one or more of Usher Syndrome Type 2A and ARRP, the one or more gRNAs comprising a spacer sequence selected from the group consisting of nucleic acid sequences in SEQ ID NOs: 5272-5314 of the Sequence Listing.

In another composition, Composition 2, the present disclosure provides one or more gRNAs of Composition 1, wherein the guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 is located in exon 13 of the USH2A gene.

In another composition, Composition 3, the present disclosure provides one or more gRNAs of any one of Compositions 1 or 2, wherein the one or more gRNAs are one or more single-molecule guide RNAs (sgRNAs).

In another composition, Composition 4, the present disclosure provides one or more gRNAs of any one of Compositions 1-3, wherein the one or more gRNAs or one or more sgRNAs is one or more modified gRNAs or one or more modified sgRNAs.

In another composition, Composition 5, the present disclosure provides one or more gRNAs of any one of Compositions 1-4, wherein the cell is a photoreceptor cell, retinal progenitor cell, mesenchymal stem cell (MSC), or induced pluripotent stem cell (iPSC).

In a first therapeutic, Therapeutic 1, the present disclosure provides a therapeutic for treating a patient with one or more of Usher Syndrome Type 2A and ARRP, the therapeutic comprising at least one or more gRNAs for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299, the one or more gRNAs comprising a spacer sequence selected from the group consisting of nucleic acid sequences in SEQ ID NOs: 5272-5314 of the Sequence Listing.

In another therapeutic, Therapeutic 2, the present disclosure provides the therapeutic of Therapeutic 1, wherein the guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 is located in exon 13 of the USH2A gene.

In another therapeutic, Therapeutic 3, the present disclosure provides the therapeutic of any one of Therapeutics 1 or 2, wherein the one or more gRNAs are one or more sgRNAs.

In another therapeutic, Therapeutic 4, the present disclosure provides the therapeutic of any one of Therapeutics 1-3, wherein the one or more gRNAs or one or more sgRNAs is one or more modified gRNAs or one or more modified sgRNAs.

In another therapeutic, Therapeutic 5, the present disclosure provides a therapeutic for treating a patient with one or more of Usher Syndrome Type 2A and ARRP, the therapeutic formed by a method comprising: introducing one or more DNA endonucleases; introducing one or more gRNA or one or more sgRNA for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299; optionally introducing one or more donor template; wherein the one or more gRNAs or sgRNAs comprise a spacer sequence selected from the group consisting of nucleic acid sequences in SEQ ID NOs: 5272-5314 of the Sequence Listing.

In another therapeutic, Therapeutic 6, the present disclosure provides the therapeutic of Therapeutic 5, wherein the guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 is located in exon 13 of the USH2A gene.

In a first kit, Kit 1, the present disclosure provides a kit for treating a patient with one or more of Usher Syndrome Type 2A and ARRP in vivo, the kit comprising: one or more gRNAs or sgRNAs for editing an USH2A gene containing a guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 wherein the one or more gRNAs or sgRNAs comprise a spacer sequence selected from the group consisting of nucleic acid sequences in SEQ ID NOs: 5272-5314 of the Sequence Listing; one or more DNA endonucleases; and optionally, one or more donor template.

In another kit, Kit 2, the present disclosure provides the kit of Kit 1, wherein the guanine deletion at nucleotide position c.2299 is located in exon 13 of the USH2A gene.

In another kit, Kit 3, the present disclosure provides any one of Kits 1 or 2, wherein the one or more DNA endonucleases is a Cas1, Cas1B, Cas2, Cas3, Cas4, Cas5, Cas6, Cas7, Cas8, Cas9 (also known as Csn1 and Csx12), Cas100, Csy1, Csy2, Csy3, Cse1, Cse2, Csc1, Csc2, Csa5, Csn2, Csm2, Csm3, Csm4, Csm5, Csm6, Cmr1, Cmr3, Cmr4, Cmr5, Cmr6, Csb1, Csb2, Csb3, Csx17, Csx14, Csx10, Csx16, CsaX, Csx3, Csx1, Csx15, Csf1, Csf2, Csf3, Csf4, or Cpf1 endonuclease; a homolog thereof, a recombination of the naturally occurring molecule thereof, codon-optimized thereof, or modified versions thereof, and combinations thereof.

In another kit, Kit 4, the present disclosure provides any one of Kits 1-3, comprising one or more donor template.

In another kit, Kit 5, the present disclosure provides the kit of Kit 4, wherein the donor template comprises homologous arms to the exon 13.

In a first nucleic acid, Nucleic Acid 1, the present disclosure provides a nucleic acid encoding a gRNA comprising a spacer sequence selected from the group consisting of SEQ ID NOs: 5272-5314.

In another nucleic acid, Nucleic Acid 2, the present disclosure provides the nucleic acid of Nucleic Acid 1, wherein the gRNA is a sgRNA.

In a first vector, Vector 1, the present disclosure provides a vector encoding a gRNA comprising a spacer sequence selected from the group consisting of SEQ ID NOs: 5272-5314.

In another vector, Vector 2, the present disclosure provides the vector of Vector 1, wherein the gRNA is a sgRNA.

In another vector, Vector 3, the present disclosure provides the vector of any one of Vectors 1 or 2, wherein the vector is an AAV.

In another vector, Vector 4, the present disclosure provides the vector of any one of Vectors 1-3, wherein the vector is an AAV5 serotype capsid vector.

Definitions

In addition to the definitions previously set forth herein, the following definitions are relevant to the present disclosure:

As used herein, the term “gene” refers to a segment of nucleic acid which encodes and is capable of expressing a specific gene product. A gene often produces a protein or polypeptide as its gene product, but a gene can produce any desired polypeptide or nucleic acid product.

The term “alteration” or “alteration of genetic information” refers to any change in the genome of a cell.

The term “insertion” refers to an addition of one or more nucleotides in a DNA sequence. Insertions can range from small insertions of a few nucleotides to insertions of large segments such as a cDNA or a gene.

The term “deletion” refers to a loss or removal of one or more nucleotides in a DNA sequence or a loss or removal of the function of a gene. In some cases, a deletion can include, for example, a loss of a few nucleotides, an exon, an intron, a gene segment, or the entire sequence of a gene. In some cases, deletion of a gene refers to the elimination or reduction of the function or expression of a gene or its gene product. This can result from not only a deletion of sequences within or near the gene, but also other events (e.g., insertion, nonsense mutation) that disrupt the expression of the gene.

The term “correction” as used herein, refers to a change of one or more nucleotides of a genome in a cell. Non-limiting examples of a change include an insertion, deletion, substitution, integration, inversion, or duplication. Such correction may result in a more favorable genotypic or phenotypic outcome, whether in structure or function, for the genomic site which is corrected. One non-limiting example of a “correction” includes the change of a mutant or defective sequence which restores structure or function to a gene or its gene product(s). Depending on the nature of the mutation, correction may be achieved via various strategies disclosed herein.

By “hybridizable” or “complementary” or “substantially complementary” it is meant that a nucleic acid (e.g., RNA) comprises a sequence of nucleotides that enables it to non-covalently bind, e.g.: form Watson-Crick base pairs, “anneal”, or “hybridize,” to another nucleic acid in a sequence-specific, antiparallel manner (i.e., a nucleic acid specifically binds to a complementary nucleic acid) under the appropriate in vitro and/or in vivo conditions of temperature and solution ionic strength. As is known in the art, standard Watson-Crick base-pairing includes: adenine (A) pairing with thymidine (T), adenine (A) pairing with uracil (U), and guanine (G) pairing with cytosine (C) [DNA, RNA]. In some examples, a spacer sequence of a gRNA or sgRNA can be fully complementary to a nucleotide sequence. In other examples, a spacer sequence of a gRNA or sgRNA may be fully complementary to a nucleotide sequence except for in at least one location. In other examples, a spacer sequence of a gRNA or sgRNA may be fully complementary to the nucleotide sequence except for in at least two locations.

The term “knock-in” refers to an addition of a DNA sequence, or fragment thereof into a genome. Such DNA sequences to be knocked-in may include an entire gene or genes, may include regulatory sequences associated with a gene or any portion or fragment of the foregoing. For example, a cDNA encoding the wild-type protein may be inserted into the genome of a cell carrying a mutant gene. Knock-in strategies need not replace the defective gene, in whole or in part. In some cases, a knock-in strategy may further involve substitution of an existing sequence with the provided sequence, e.g., substitution of a mutant allele with a wild-type copy. On the other hand, the term “knock-out” refers to the elimination of a gene or the expression of a gene. For example, a gene can be knocked out by either a deletion or an addition of a nucleotide sequence that leads to a disruption of the reading frame. As another example, a gene may be knocked out by replacing a part of the gene with an irrelevant sequence. Finally, the term “knock-down” as used herein refers to reduction in the expression of a gene or its gene product(s). As a result of a gene knock-down, the protein activity or function may be attenuated or the protein levels may be reduced or eliminated.

The term “comprising” or “comprises” is used in reference to compositions, therapeutics, kits, methods, and respective component(s) thereof, that are essential to the present disclosure, yet open to the inclusion of unspecified elements, whether essential or not.

The term “consisting essentially of” refers to those elements required for a given aspect. The term permits the presence of additional elements that do not materially affect the basic and novel or functional characteristic(s) of that aspect of the present disclosure.

The term “consisting of” refers to compositions, therapeutics, kits, methods, and respective components thereof as described herein, which are exclusive of any element not recited in that description of the aspect.

The singular forms “a,” “an,” and “the” include plural references, unless the context clearly dictates otherwise.

Any numerical range recited in this specification describes all sub-ranges of the same numerical precision (i.e., having the same number of specified digits) subsumed within the recited range. For example, a recited range of “1.0 to 10.0” describes all sub-ranges between (and including) the recited minimum value of 1.0 and the recited maximum value of 10.0, such as, for example, “2.4 to 7.6,” even if the range of “2.4 to 7.6” is not expressly recited in the text of the specification. Accordingly, the Applicant reserves the right to amend this specification, including the claims, to expressly recite any sub-range of the same numerical precision subsumed within the ranges expressly recited in this specification. All such ranges are inherently described in this specification such that amending to expressly recite any such sub-ranges will comply with written description, sufficiency of description, and added matter requirements, including the requirements under 35 U.S.C. § 112(a) and Article 123(2) EPC. Also, unless expressly specified or otherwise required by context, all numerical parameters described in this specification (such as those expressing values, ranges, amounts, percentages, and the like) may be read as if prefaced by the word “about,” even if the word “about” does not expressly appear before a number. Additionally, numerical parameters described in this specification should be construed in light of the number of reported significant digits, numerical precision, and by applying ordinary rounding techniques. It is also understood that numerical parameters described in this specification will necessarily possess the inherent variability characteristic of the underlying measurement techniques used to determine the numerical value of the parameter.

Any patent, publication, or other disclosure material identified herein is incorporated by reference into this specification in its entirety unless otherwise indicated, but only to the extent that the incorporated material does not conflict with existing descriptions, definitions, statements, or other disclosure material expressly set forth in this specification. As such, and to the extent necessary, the express disclosure as set forth in this specification supersedes any conflicting material incorporated by reference. Any material, or portion thereof, that is said to be incorporated by reference into this specification, but which conflicts with existing definitions, statements, or other disclosure material set forth herein, is only incorporated to the extent that no conflict arises between that incorporated material and the existing disclosure material. Applicants reserve the right to amend this specification to expressly recite any subject matter, or portion thereof, incorporated by reference herein.

The details of one or more aspects of the present disclosure are set forth in the accompanying examples below. Although any materials and methods similar or equivalent to those described herein can be used in the practice or testing of the present disclosure, specific examples of the materials and methods contemplated are now described. Other features, objects and advantages of the present disclosure will be apparent from the description. In the description examples, the singular forms also include the plural unless the context clearly dictates otherwise. Unless defined otherwise, all technical and scientific terms used herein have the same meaning as commonly understood by one of ordinary skill in the art to which this present disclosure belongs. In the case of conflict, the present description will control.

EXAMPLES

The present disclosure will be more fully understood by reference to the following examples, which provide illustrative, non-limiting aspects of the invention.

The examples describe the use of the CRISPR system as an illustrative genome editing technique to create defined therapeutic genomic deletions, insertions, or replacements within the USH2A gene that lead to an excision of the c.2299delG or a correction of the c.2299delG in the genomic locus that restores usherin protein function. Introduction of the defined therapeutic modifications represents a novel therapeutic strategy for the potential amelioration, if not elimination, of one or more of Usher Syndrome Type 2A and ARRP, as described and illustrated herein.

Example 1—CRISPR/S.Pyogenes (Sp)Cas9 PAM Sites in Regions Upstream and Downstream of the c.2299delG in the USH2A Gene

To discover target sites for genome editing by SpCas9, a 5000 bp segment including regions upstream of the c.2299delG and regions downstream of the c.2299delG was scanned for SpCas9 protospacer adjacent motifs (PAMs). The 5000 bp segment included about 2000 bp of the intron 12-13 region of the USH2A gene, exon 13 of the USH2A gene (642 bp), and about 2000 bp of the intron 13-14 region of the USH2A gene. The area was scanned for PAMs having the sequence NRG. gRNA spacer sequences (17-24 bps.) located immediately upstream of the NRG PAM were then identified. These sequences are candidates for use in editing the gene.

Example 2—CRISPR/S. aureus(Sa)Cas9 PAM Sites in Regions Upstream and Downstream of the c.2299delG in the USH2A Gene

To discover target sites for genome editing by SaCas9, a 5000 bp segment including regions upstream of the c.2299delG and regions downstream of the c.2299delG is scanned for SaCas9 PAMs. The 5000 bp segment included about 2000 bp of the intron 12-13 region of the USH2A gene, exon 13 of the USH2A gene (642 bp), and about 2000 bp of the intron 13-14 region of the USH2A gene. The area is scanned for PAMs having the sequence NNGRRT. gRNA spacer sequences (17-24 bps) located immediately upstream of the NNGRRT PAM are then identified. These sequences are candidates for use in editing the gene.

Example 3—CRISPR/S. thermophilus(St)Cas9 PAM Sites in Regions Upstream and Downstream of the c.2299delG in the USH2A Gene

To discover target sites for genome editing by StCas9, a 5000 bp segment including regions upstream of the c.2299delG and regions downstream of the c.2299delG is scanned for StCas9 PAMs. The 5000 bp segment included about 2000 bp of the intron 12-13 region of the USH2A gene, exon 13 of the USH2A gene (642 bp), and about 2000 bp of the intron 13-14 region of the USH2A gene. The area is scanned for PAMs having the sequence NNAGAAW. gRNA spacer sequences (17-24 bps) located immediately upstream of the NNAGAAW PAM are then identified. These sequences are candidates for use in editing the gene.

Example 4—CRISPR/T. denticola (Td)Cas9 PAM Sites in Regions Upstream and Downstream of the c.2299delG in the USH2A Gene

To discover target sites for genome editing by TdCas9, a 5000 bp segment including regions upstream of the c.2299delG and regions downstream of the c.2299delG is scanned for TdCas9 PAMs. The 5000 bp segment included about 2000 bp of the intron 12-13 region of the USH2A gene, exon 13 of the USH2A gene (642 bp), and about 2000 bp of the intron 13-14 region of the USH2A gene. The area is scanned for PAMs having the sequence NAAAAC. gRNA spacer sequences (17-24 bps) located immediately upstream of the NAAAAC PAM are then identified. These sequences are candidates for use in editing the gene.

Example 5—CRISPR/N. meningitides (Nm)Cas9 PAM Sites in Regions Upstream and Downstream of the c.2299delG in the USH2A Gene

To discover target sites for genome editing by NmCas9, a 5000 bp segment including regions upstream of the c.2299delG and regions downstream of the c.2299delG is scanned for NmCas9 PAMs. The 5000 bp segment included about 2000 bp of the intron 12-13 region of the USH2A gene, exon 13 of the USH2A gene (642 bp), and about 2000 bp of the intron 13-14 region of the USH2A gene. The area is scanned for PAMs having the sequence NNNNGHTT. gRNA spacer sequences (17-24 bps) located immediatly upstream of the NNNNGHTT PAM are then identified. These sequences are candidates for use in editing the gene

Example 6—CRISPR/Cpf1 PAM Sites in Regions Upstream and Downstream of the c.2299delG in the USH2A Gene

To discover target sites for genome editing by Cpf1, a 5000 bp segment including regions upstream of the c.2299delG and regions downstream of the c.2299delG is scanned for Cpf1 PAMs. The 5000 bp segment included about 2000 bp of the intron 12-13 region of the USH2A gene, exon 13 of the USH2A gene (642 bp), and about 2000 bp of the intron 13-14 region of the USH2A gene. The area is scanned for PAMs having the sequence YTN. gRNA spacer sequences (17-24 bps) located immediately upstream of the YTN PAM were then identified. These sequences are candidates for use in editing the gene

Example 7—Bioinformatics Analysis of the Guide RNAs

A gRNA or sgRNA can direct an RNP complex to an on-target site such as a genomic sequence for which editing is desired but may also have the potential to interact with an off-target site for which editing is not desired. To identify which candidate gRNAs that were likely to have on-target and/or off-target activity, candidate gRNAs were screened and selected in a single process or multi-step process that used both in silico analysis of binding and experimentally assessed activity at both on-target and off-target sites

By way of illustration, candidate gRNAs having sequences that match a particular on-target site, such as a site upstream or downstream of the c.2299delG in the USH2A gene, with an adjacent PAM were assessed for their potential to cleave at off-target sites having similar sequences, using one or more of a variety of bioinformatics tools available for assessing off-target binding, as described and illustrated in more detail below, in order to assess the likelihood of effects at chromosomal positions other than those intended.

Candidates predicted to have relatively lower potential for off-target activity were then assessed experimentally to measure their on-target activity, and then off-target activities at various sites. gRNAs having sufficiently high on-target activity to achieve desired levels of gene editing at the selected locus, and relatively lower off-target activity to reduce the likelihood of alterations at other chromosomal loci were preferred. The ratio of on-target to off-target activity is often referred to as the “specificity” of a gRNA.

For initial screening of predicted off-target activities, there were a number of bioinformatics tools known and publicly available that were used to predict the most likely off-target sites; and since binding to target sites in the CRISPR/Cas9/Cpf1 nuclease system is driven by Watson-Crick base pairing between complementary sequences, the degree of dissimilarity (and therefore reduced potential for off-target binding) was essentially related to primary sequence differences: mismatches and bulges, i.e. bases that were changed to a non-complementary base, and insertions or deletions of bases in the potential off-target site relative to the target site. An exemplary bioinformatics tool called COSMID (CRISPR Off-target Sites with Mismatches, Insertions and Deletions) (available on the web at crispr.bme.gatech.edu) compiles such similarities. Other bioinformatics tools include, but are not limited to autoCOSMID and CCTop.

Bioinformatic tools were used to minimize off-target cleavage in order to reduce the detrimental effects of mutations and chromosomal rearrangements. Studies on CRISPR/Cas9 systems suggested the possibility of off-target activity due to non-specific hybridization of the guide strand to DNA sequences with base pair mismatches and/or bulges, particularly at positions distal from the PAM region. Therefore, it was important to have a bioinformatics tool that identified potential off-target sites that have insertions and/or deletions between the RNA guide strand and genomic sequences, in addition to base-pair mismatches. Bioinformatics tools based upon the off-target prediction algorithm CCTop were used to search genomes for potential CRISPR off-target sites (CCTop is available on the web at crispr.cos.uni-heidelberg.de/). The output ranked lists of the potential off-target sites based on the number and location of mismatches, allowing more informed choice of target sites, and avoiding the use of sites with more likely off-target cleavage.

Additional bioinformatics pipelines were employed that weigh the estimated on- and/or off-target activity of gRNA targeting sites in a region. Other features that were used to predict activity include information about the cell type in question, DNA accessibility, chromatin state, transcription factor binding sites, transcription factor binding data, and other CHIP-seq data. Additional factors were weighed that predict editing efficiency, such as relative positions and directions of pairs of gRNAs, local sequence features and micro-homologies.

The processes allowed for selection of high specificity gRNAs or sgRNAs.

Example 8—Testing sgRNA On-Target Activity in SpCas9-Expressing HEK 293FT Cells

To further evaluate gRNAs provided herein, selected sgRNAs were tested for on-target editing efficiency. sgRNAs that hybridize either upstream or downstream of the c.2299delG mutation were tested in wild-type HEK 293FT cells, using SpCas9. Because the sgRNAs bind to DNA sequences near, but not overlapping with, the c.2299delG mutation, Applicants performed these experiments in wild-type HEK 293FT cells.

The HEK 293FT cells comprise a SpCas9 open reading frame (ORF) operably linked to a constitutive promoter integrated into the AAVS1 locus. The cells were cultured in 10% heat-inactivated (HI) FBS/90% DMEM supplemented with 1m/ml puromycin and passaged every 3-4 days.

The HEK 293FT cells were seeded in 100 μl of 10% HI FBS/90% DMEM at 50,000 cells per well in a 96-well plate, and transfected with 1 μg of sgRNA using Lipofectamine® Messenger-Max™ (available from Thermo Fisher Scientific, Massachusetts, US).

sgRNAs used for this assay were synthesized by in vitro transcription (IVT). The sgRNAs target locations downstream or upstream of the c.2299delG mutation. Specifically, individual sgRNAs can target sequences within intron 12-13, within exon 13, or within intron 13-14. Thus, combinations of these sgRNAs (e.g., dual sgRNAs, see Example 9) are suitable to cause deletions consistent with those shown in FIGS. 3 B-D.

At 48 hours post-transfection, culture medium was removed and total DNA was extracted using prepGem® Tissue Kit (available from VWR, Pennsylvania, US). The sequence surrounding the loci targeted by the sgRNAs was PCR amplified. The resulting products were cleaned up using AMPure XP beads (Available form Beckman Coulter, California, US), and sequenced to assess Cas9-mediated genetic modifications. The frequencies of small insertions and deletions (indels) were estimated using TIDE.

Sequence analysis revealed that the sgRNAs that target locations upstream and downstream of the c.2299delG mutation had an on-target editing efficiency range of 50.9% to 87.7% (FIG. 4).

These data provide evidence that sgRNAs provided herein can display on-target activity for the sequence surrounding the c.2299delG mutation. Sequences displaying such on-target activity are useful for gene editing, for example, for use in therapeutic methods described in FIGS. 3 B-D and throughout the specification.

Example 9—Testing of Dual sgRNAs for On-Target Activity in HEK 293FT Cells

To further evaluate gRNAs provided herein, selected sgRNAs were tested for on-target editing efficiency. sgRNAs that hybridize either upstream or downstream of the c.2299delG mutation were tested in wild-type HEK 293FT cells, using SpCas9. Because the sgRNAs bind to DNA sequences near, but not overlapping with, the c.2299delG mutation, Applicants performed these experiments in wild-type HEK 293FT cells. The selected sgRNAs were tested in pairs for their ability to cause a deletion of the intervening sequence between their respective target sites. As used herein, “dual sgRNAs” can refer to this approach to creating a genomic deletion.

The HEK 293FT cells comprise a SpCas9 open reading frame (ORF) operably linked to a constitutive promoter integrated into the AAVS1 locus. The cells were cultured in 10% HI FBS/90% DMEM supplemented with 1m/ml puromycin and passaged every 3-4 days.

The HEK 293FT cells were seeded in 100 μl of 10% HI FBS/90% DMEM at 50,000 cells per well in a 96-well plate. Transfection was performed with 0.5 μg of a first sgRNA that targets a sequence in intron 12-13 and 0.5 μg of a second sgRNA that targets a sequence either in exon 13 or in intron 13-14 of the USH2A gene. FIG. 5 shows the locations of sequences targeted by the sgRNAs used in this Example. FIG. 6A shows a table listing the pairs of sgRNAs used in this Example and describing the deletion expected to result after transfection. Transfection was performed using Lipofectamine® Messenger-Max™.

The sgRNAs used in this study were synthesized by Thermo Fisher Scientific. The sgRNAs comprise a specific spacer sequence (sgRNA comprising any of the spacer sequences listed in FIG. 5) and the vendor's proprietary tracrRNA sequence.

The transfected HEK 293FT cells expressing SpCas9 were compared to control cells, which were either un-transfected HEK 293FT cells expressing SpCas9 or HEK 293FT cells expressing SpCas9 that were transfected with a mRNA encoding for mCherry (data not shown).

TIDE analysis cannot be used to measure editing efficiency when dual sgRNAs are used since a large region of genomic DNA is excised and the TIDE software cannot quantify these larger deletions. TIDE analysis is better suited to analyze small sized deletions and insertions such as those expected to be generated via NHEJ resulting from a DSB generated by a single sgRNA. In addition, shorter length PCR products would be favored in a PCR reaction to estimate the editing level of dual sgRNAs, thus overestimating the percentage of edited cells. Instead, quantitative analysis of deletions generated from edits by the first sgRNA and second sgRNA can be best performed using droplet digital (dd)PCR.

Genomic DNA was harvested from transfected wild-type HEK 293FT cells 48 hours after transfection using a DNeasy® Blood and Tissue Kit (available from Qiagen, Netherlands). Genomic DNA was digested with an XHOI restriction enzyme, and 50 ng was used for ddPCR. During ddPCR, two PCR products (a “target” PCR product and “reference” PCR product) could be amplified (FIG. 6B). To reduce the viscosity before ddPCR, the genomic DNA is digested with XHOI, which does not cut in the immediate vicinity of the two PCR products or the regions between them.

ddPCR was performed by using 2 primer and probe sets. A first primer and probe set comprises a forward primer: TCCATGGCTCAGTGAACAAA (SEQ ID NO: 5401), a reverse primer: CTTCAACATTGGGCTTGCAG (SEQ ID NO: 5402), and a probe: ACACAGCTGGATCCCTCCCTGGGACT (SEQ ID NO: 5403). The probe is labeled with 5′6 FAM-3BHQ. The primers amplify a piece of DNA on Exon 13 of USH2A (a target PCR product).

A second primer and probe set comprises a forward primer: TCCAGATGGTAGCTGAGGTT (SEQ ID NO: 5404), a reverse primer: GTCCCAGAGGGAAACTTGAC (SEQ ID NO: 5405), and a probe: GCTGACCACCAGCCAAAGGGGCAC (SEQ ID NO: 5406). The probe is labeled with 5′HEX-3BHQ. The primers amplify a piece of DNA on Exon 17 of USH2A (a reference PCR product) (FIG. 6B).

In unedited cells, no genomic DNA is deleted, and the primers and probe sets amplify and label both the reference and the target PCR products. In edited cells, where at least a portion of USH2A exon 13 has been excised (e.g., deleted), the primer and probe set for the target cannot bind, cannot amplify, and cannot label the target PCR product. However, the DNA on USH2A exon 17 is unaffected and the reference PCR product can be still amplified and labeled. Therefore, the ratio of target PCR product to reference PCR product in unedited cells is close to 1. In edited cells, the ratio of target PCR product to reference PCR product decreases. Exon 13 Deletion Efficiency (%) was calculated as (1−the ratio of target product to reference product)*100.

17 gRNAs were selected to be tested as dual sgRNAs for their ability to induce whole or partial exon 13 deletion. The first sgRNA targets within intron 12-13, and the second sgRNA targets within exon 13 or within intron 13-14 of the USH2A gene (FIG. 5). The size of the deletion products generated from edits between the first sgRNA and the second sgRNA was calculated from theoretically predicted DNA break sites located three nucleotides upstream of the PAM sequence for each of the first sgRNAs and the second sgRNAs (FIG. 6A). The size of the deletion products ranged from 248 to 847 bp.

The deletion efficiency of dual gRNAs was determined to be in the range of 22% to 68.4% (FIG. 6C).

When HEK 293FT cells were transfected with a first sgRNA, USH2AEx13Mut_T2 (a sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5295), and a second sgRNA, USH2AEx13Mut_T81 (a sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5313), a whole exon 13 deletion was achieved in 22.01±7.5% of genomic DNA.

When HEK 293FT cells were transfected with a first sgRNA, USH2AEx13Mut_T2 (a sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5295), and a second sgRNA, USH2AEx13Mut_T84 (a sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5314), a whole exon 13 deletion was achieved in 24.23±5.21% of genomic DNA.

When HEK 293FT cells were transfected with a first sgRNA, USH2AEx13Mut_T24 (a sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5299), and a second sgRNA, USH2AEx13Mut_T81 (a sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5313), a whole exon 13 deletion was achieved in 30.12±8.25% of genomic DNA.

When HEK 293FT cells were transfected with a first sgRNA, USH2AEx13Mut_T24 (a sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5299), and a second sgRNA, USH2AEx13Mut_T84 (a sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5314), a whole exon 13 deletion was achieved in 26.94±7.78% of genomic DNA.

When HEK 293FT cells were transfected with a first sgRNA, USH2AEx13Mut_T2 (a sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5295), and a second sgRNA, USH2AEx13Mut_T57 (a sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5276), a partial exon 13 deletion was achieved in 37.07±24.27% of genomic DNA.

When HEK 293FT cells were transfected with a first sgRNA, USH2AEx13Mut_T2 (a sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5295), and a second sgRNA, USH2AEx13Mut_T37 (a sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5275), a partial exon 13 deletion was achieved in 62.34±7.43% of genomic DNA.

When HEK 293FT cells were transfected with a first sgRNA, USH2AEx13Mut_T2 (a sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5295), and a second sgRNA, USH2AEx13Mut_T35 (a sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5277), a partial exon 13 deletion was achieved in 66.91±2.16% of genomic DNA.

When HEK 293FT cells were transfected with a first sgRNA, USH2AEx13Mut_T2 (a sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5295), and a second sgRNA, USH2AEx13Mut_T13 (a sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5278), a partial exon 13 deletion was achieved in 32.77±14.02% of genomic DNA.

When HEK 293FT cells were transfected with a first sgRNA, USH2AEx13Mut_T2 (a sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5295), and a second sgRNA, USH2AEx13Mut_T43 (a sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5287), a partial exon 13 deletion was achieved in 68.43±0.23% of genomic DNA.

When HEK 293FT cells were transfected with a first sgRNA, USH2AEx13Mut_T2 (a sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5295), and a second sgRNA, USH2AEx13Mut_T17 (a sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5286), a partial exon 13 deletion was achieved in 36.85±17.32% of genomic DNA.

When HEK 293FT cells were transfected with a first sgRNA, USH2AEx13Mut_T2 (a sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5295), and a second sgRNA, USH2AEx13Mut_T60 (a sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5290), a partial exon 13 deletion was achieved in 28.09±8.88% of genomic DNA.

When HEK 293FT cells were transfected with a first sgRNA, USH2AEx13Mut_T2 (a sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5295), and a second sgRNA, USH2AEx13Mut_T14 (a sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5291), a partial exon 13 deletion was achieved in 35.82±7.82% of genomic DNA.

When HEK 293FT cells were transfected with a first sgRNA, USH2AEx13Mut_T2 (a sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5295), and a second sgRNA, USH2AEx13Mut_T38 (a sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5292), a partial exon 13 deletion was achieved in 18.12±6.81% of genomic DNA.

When HEK 293FT cells were transfected with a first sgRNA, USH2AEx13Mut_T2 (a sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5295), and a second sgRNA, USH2AEx13Mut_T69 (a sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5294), a partial exon 13 deletion was achieved in 27.02±15.67% of genomic DNA.

When HEK 293FT cells were transfected with a first sgRNA, USH2AEx13Mut_T2 (a sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5295), and a second sgRNA, USH2AEx13Mut_T19 (a sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5296), a partial exon 13 deletion was achieved in 35.24±7.62% of genomic DNA.

When HEK 293FT cells were transfected with a first sgRNA, USH2AEx13Mut_T2 (a sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5295), and a second sgRNA, USH2AEx13Mut_T51 (a sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5302), a partial exon 13 deletion was achieved in 25.14±9.46% of genomic DNA.

When HEK 293FT cells were transfected with a first sgRNA, USH2AEx13Mut_T2 (a sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5295), and a second sgRNA, USH2AEx13Mut_T3 (a sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5310), a partial exon 13 deletion was achieved in 27.88±4.58% of genomic DNA.

When HEK 293FT cells were transfected with a first sgRNA, USH2AEx13Mut_T24 (a sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5299), and a second sgRNA, USH2AEx13Mut_T57 (a sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5276), a partial exon 13 deletion was achieved in 43.10±24.61% of genomic DNA.

When HEK 293FT cells were transfected with a first sgRNA, USH2AEx13Mut_T24 (a sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5299), and a second sgRNA, USH2AEx13Mut_T37 (a sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5275), a partial exon 13 deletion was achieved in 60.65±7.48% of genomic DNA.

When HEK 293FT cells were transfected with a first sgRNA, USH2AEx13Mut_T24 (a sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5299), and a second sgRNA, USH2AEx13Mut_T35 (a sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5277), a partial exon 13 deletion was achieved in 67.85±6.07% of genomic DNA.

When HEK 293FT cells were transfected with a first sgRNA, USH2AEx13Mut_T24 (a sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5299), and a second sgRNA, USH2AEx13Mut_T13 (a sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5278), a partial exon 13 deletion was achieved in 45.06±8.60% of genomic DNA.

When HEK 293FT cells were transfected with a first sgRNA, USH2AEx13Mut_T24 (a sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5299), and a second sgRNA, USH2AEx13Mut_T43 (a sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5287), a partial exon 13 deletion was achieved in 61.27±6.17% of genomic DNA.

When HEK 293FT cells were transfected with a first sgRNA, USH2AEx13Mut_T24 (a sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5299), and a second sgRNA, USH2AEx13Mut_T17 (a sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5286), a partial exon 13 deletion was achieved in 47.53±5.89% of genomic DNA.

When HEK 293FT cells were transfected with a first sgRNA, USH2AEx13Mut_T24 (a sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5299), and a second sgRNA, USH2AEx13Mut_T60 (a sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5290), a partial exon 13 deletion was achieved in 35.74±5.61% of genomic DNA.

When HEK 293FT cells were transfected with a first sgRNA, USH2AEx13Mut_T24 (a sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5299), and a second sgRNA, USH2AEx13Mut_T14 (a sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5291), a partial exon 13 deletion was achieved in 35.59±9.33% of genomic DNA.

When HEK 293FT cells were transfected with a first sgRNA, USH2AEx13Mut_T24 (a sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5299), and a second sgRNA, USH2AEx13Mut_T38 (a sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5292), a partial exon 13 deletion was achieved in 28.01±1.78% of genomic DNA.

When HEK 293FT cells were transfected with a first sgRNA, USH2AEx13Mut_T24 (a sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5299), and a second sgRNA, USH2AEx13Mut_T69 (a sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5294), a partial exon 13 deletion was achieved in 39.50±1.17% of genomic DNA.

When HEK 293FT cells were transfected with a first sgRNA, USH2AEx13Mut_T24 (a sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5299), and a second sgRNA, USH2AEx13Mut_T19 (a sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5296), a partial exon 13 deletion was achieved in 41.22±3.51% of genomic DNA.

When HEK 293FT cells were transfected with a first sgRNA, USH2AEx13Mut_T24 (a sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5299), and a second sgRNA, USH2AEx13Mut_T51 (a sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5302), a partial exon 13 deletion was achieved in 38.88±4.11% of genomic DNA.

When HEK 293FT cells were transfected with a first sgRNA, USH2AEx13Mut_T24 (a sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5299), and a second sgRNA, USH2AEx13Mut_T3 (a sgRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5310), a partial exon 13 deletion was achieved in 30.13±1.76% of genomic DNA.

These data provide evidence that gRNAs provided herein can be used as dual sgRNAs to delete at least a portion of exon 13 of the USH2A gene and therefore are useful in therapeutic methods described in FIGS. 3B and 3C and throughout the specification.

Example 10—Testing of Dual sgRNAs for On-Target Activity in HEK 293 Cells

To test a therapeutic approach depicted in FIG. 3D, a first gRNA of the present disclosure for example, a sgRNA comprising either of the spacer sequences reported in SEQ ID NOs: 5313 and 5314 is paired with a second sgRNA of the present disclosure. The second sgRNA comprises a spacer sequence that results in targeting an RNP complex to a sequence within exon 13 of the USH2A gene. A genomic deletion, as described in FIG. 3D is thereby generated. Efficiency of the deletion is calculated as described herein (e.g., as described in Example 9).

These data can provide support for use of gRNAs provided herein as dual sgRNAs to delete at least a portion of exon 13 of the USH2A gene and therefore are useful in therapeutic methods described in FIG. 3D and throughout the specification.

Example 11—Testing of Dual sgRNAs

Selected sgRNAs are tested in HEK 293 cells, which have been engineered to carry the c.2299delG mutation. In some tests, the deletion efficiency of dual sgRNAs provided herein is determined.

Selected sgRNAs are tested in immortalized fibroblasts derived from patients carrying the c.2299delG mutation. In some tests, the deletion efficiency of dual sgRNAs provided herein is determined.

Selected sgRNAs are tested in Y79 cells, which are a retinoblastoma cell line that expresses mRNA for USH2A. In some tests, the deletion efficiency of dual sgRNAs provided herein is determined.

Example 12—Testing of Guide RNAs in Cells for Genomic Off-Target Activity

It is generally desirable to limit off-target editing. Accordingly, to determine the extent of off-target editing on a genomic level, gRNAs (or sgRNAs) demonstrated to have on-target activity are tested for targeted-genome-wide off-target editing using GUIDE-seq, Amplicon-seq, and/or Digenome-seq. Off-target effects are tested in human cells. Such methods are known in the art and examples are provided herein.

Example 13—Testing Different Approaches for HDR Gene Editing

In addition to testing a gRNA for both on-target activity and off-target activity, the HDR strategy is tested.

For the HDR strategy, donor DNA template is provided as a short single-stranded oligonucleotide, a short double-stranded oligonucleotide (PAM sequence intact/PAM sequence mutated), a long single-stranded DNA molecule (PAM sequence intact/PAM sequence mutated) or a long double-stranded DNA molecule (PAM sequence intact/PAM sequence mutated). In some examples, the donor DNA template is delivered by AAV.

These results demonstrate the efficacy of the various HDR gene editing strategies and are used to select effective constructs and strategies.

Example 14—Re-Assessment of Lead CRISPR-Cas9/DNA Donor Combinations

In some cases, one or more lead CRISPR-Cas9/DNA donor combinations are assessed in cells for efficiency of deletion, recombination, and off-target specificity. In some examples, Cas9 mRNA or RNP are formulated into lipid nanoparticles for delivery, sgRNAs are formulated into nanoparticles or delivered as a recombinant AAV particle, and donor DNA is formulated into nanoparticles or delivered as recombinant AAV particle.

These data demonstrate the efficacy of a formulation for, e.g., an HDR strategy.

Example 15—Testing for a Partial or Full Deletion of Exon 13 (Exon Skipping)

After testing the gRNAs for both on-target activity and off-target activity, combinations of two guide RNAs (e.g., dual sgRNAs) are tested to determine their ability to induce partial deletion or full deletion of exon 13 by gene editing. The first guide RNA targets a 5′ locus upstream of the c.2299delG (within or near the intron 12-13 or the exon 13 of the USH2A gene) and the second guide RNA targets a 3′ locus downstream of the c.2299delG (within or near the exon 13 or the intron 13-14 of the USH2A gene). Efficient gene editing results in transcription of shorter mRNA molecules lacking exon 13 and in translation of a shorter usherin protein. Deletion of partial or the entire exon 13 at DNA level is analyzed by PCR, agarose gel, and next generation sequencing. In addition, mRNA and protein analyses are performed measuring the level of expression and the type of transcripts in human cells expressing USH2A.

Example 16—In Vivo Testing in Relevant Animal Model

Selected CRISPR-Cas9/guide combinations identified herein are tested in vivo in an animal model, such as a rhesus macaque (Macaca mulatta) and crab-eating macaque (Macaca fascicularis). In addition, formulations are tested in a human eye from a human donor.

NOTE REGARDING ILLUSTRATIVE EXAMPLES

While the present disclosure provides descriptions of various specific aspects for the purpose of illustrating various examples of the present disclosure and/or its potential applications, it is understood that variations and modifications will occur to those skilled in the art. Accordingly, the invention or inventions described herein should be understood to be at least as broad as they are claimed, and not as more narrowly defined by particular illustrative examples provided herein. 

What is claimed is:
 1. A composition comprising a first gRNA and a second gRNA, wherein the first gRNA and the second gRNA are selected from the group consisting of: (a) a first gRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5295 and a second gRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5313; (b) a first gRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5295 and a second gRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5314; (c) a first gRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5299 and a second gRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5313; (d) a first gRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5299 and a second gRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5314; (e) a first gRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5295 and a second gRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5276; (f) a first gRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5295 and a second gRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5275; (g) a first gRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5295 and a second gRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5277; (h) a first gRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5295 and a second gRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5278; (i) a first gRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5295 and a second gRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5287; (j) a first gRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5295 and a second gRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5286; (k) a first gRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5295 and a second gRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5290; (I) a first gRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5295 and a second gRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5291; (m) a first gRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5295 and a second gRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5292; (n) a first gRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5295 and a second gRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5294; (o) a first gRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5295 and a second gRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5296; (p) a first gRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5295 and a second gRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5302; (q) a first gRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5295 and a second gRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5310; (r) a first gRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5299 and a second gRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5276; (s) a first gRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5299 and a second gRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5275; (t) a first gRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5299 and a second gRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5277; (u) a first gRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5299 and a second gRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5278; (v) a first gRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5299 and a second gRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5287; (w) a first gRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5299 and a second gRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5286; (x) a first gRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5299 and a second gRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5290; (y) a first gRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5299 and a second gRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5291; (z) a first gRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5299 and a second gRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5292; (aa) a first gRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5299 and a second gRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5294; (bb) a first gRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5299 and a second gRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5296; (cc) a first gRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5299 and a second gRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5302; and (dd) a first gRNA comprising SEQ ID NO: 5299 and a second gRNA comprising SEQ ID NO:
 5310. 2. The composition of claim 1, wherein the gRNAs are sgRNAs. 